Skip to main content

Full text of "Visible speech, the science of universal alphabetics : or, Self-interpreting physiological letters, for the writing of all languages in one alphabet, illus. by tables, diagrams, and examples"

See other formats


tbc  HJemori)  of 
EDWARD    CHARLES     BELL, 

ONE    OF    THE    FIRST    PROFICIENTS    IN    "VISIBLE    SPEECH, 

WHOSE    ABILITY 
IN    DEMONSTRATING    THE    LINGUISTIC    APPLICATIONS    OF    THE    SYSTEM 

EXCITED    THE    ADMIRATION    OF    ALL    WHO    HEARD    HIM  ; 

I5UT    WHOSE    LIFE    OF    HIGHEST    PROMISE    WAS    CUT    OFF    IN*   HIS 

NINETEENTH    YEAR, 

ON    I;TII    MAY,    1867; 

THIS     INAUGURAL     VOLUME      IS     DEDICATED 

BY     HIS    FATHER. 


CONTENTS. 

Page 

Preface,          ...         ...         ...          ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  ...  ...  vii 

Popular  Description  of  the  Organs  of  Speech,          ...          ...          ...  ...  ...  11 

Diagram  of  the  Organs  of  Speech,    ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...  ...  13 

The  Invention  of  Visible  Speech,     ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...  ...  14 

TABULAR  EXPOSITION  OF  VISIBLE  SPEECH. 

Complete  Table  of  Eadical  Symbols,     ...          ...         ...          ...  ...  ...  35 

Ten  Radical  Symbols  from  which  all  Vowel  and  Consonant  Letters  are  formed,  36 

Complete  Table  of  Letters — with  their  Names,             ..          ...  ...  ...  37 

Diagrams  showing  the  relation  of  the  Primary  Organic  Symbols  to  the  Organs,  38 

Explanatory  Table  of  Symbols  for  Vowel  Configurations,       ...  ...  ...  40 

Table  showing  the  mutual  relation  of  Symbols  and  Sounds,  ...  ...  ...  41 

THEORETICAL  EXPLANATIONS,  EXERCISES,  &c. 

Rudimental  Symbols,     ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...  ...  45 

Exercises  on  the  Rudimental  Symbols,  forming  Interjectional  or  Inarticulate 

Utterances,             ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  ...  ...  50 

CONSONANTS,        ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...  ...  51 

Table  of  Organic  Symbols,        ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...  ...  52 

Diagrams  of  the  Consonant  Organic  Positions,            ...          ...  ...  ...  53 

Description  of  the  'Inner'  and  'Outer'  Varieties  of  each  of  the  Primary 

Consonants,             ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  ...  ..  54- 

Table  of  the  Mechanical  Varieties  of  Consonants,       ...          ...  ...  ...  5G 

Diagrams  of  the  Mechanical  Varieties  of  Consonants.             ...  ...  ...  57 

Description  of  the  Mechanical  Varieties  of  Consonants,          ...  ...  ...  58 

'  Inner'  and  '  Outer  '  Varieties  of  '  Divided  '  Consonants,       ...  ...  ...  59 

Uni -Lateral  Formations,            ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...  ...  ib. 

Nasal  Consonants,          ...          ...         ...          ...         ...         ...  ...  ...  ib. 

Shut  Consonants,           ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  ...  ...  60 

Consonant  Suctions — Clicks,     ...          ...          ...          ...         ...  ...  ...  62 

Consonant  Actions  without  Breath,      ...          ...          ...         ...  ...  ...  ib. 

Comparative  Diagrams  of  the  Radical  Consonant  Positions,...  ...  ...  63 

Example  showing  the  Application  of  the  Modifiers  to  a  single  Consonant  action,  64 

Interjectional  Exercises  on  the  Rudimental  Consonant  Symbols,  ...  ...  65 

Voiced  Consonants,         ...          ...          ...         ...         ...         ...  ...  ...  66 

General  Scheme  of  Consonants,             ...         ...          ...         ...  ...  ...  ib. 

Imperfect  and  Variable  Vocality  of  Consonants,         ...          ...  ...  ...  67 

'  Held '  Consonants,        ...          ...          ...          ...          ...         ...  ...  ...  68 

Consonant  Combinations,           ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  ...  ...  ib. 

GLIDES,    ...          ...          ...          ...  6(.) 

Complete  Table  of  the  Glides, 70 

VOWELS,  ...          ...          ...          ...                                                 •••  71 

Vowel  Symbols,  ...          ...         ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...  "2 

Diagrams  showing  the  Relative  Organic  Formation  of  Vowel?,  ...  ...  73 


Page- 
Diagram  showing  the  Scale  formed  by  the  Lingual  Vowels,               ...  ...          74 

Relation  of  Vowel  to  Consonant  Positions,      ...          ...          ...          ...  75 

Lip-Modified  or  '  Round  '  Vowels,        7(5 

Symbols  of  Round  Vowels,        ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  77 

Nasalized  Vowels,          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ib. 

Vowels  of  Gliding  Quality — Diphthongs,         ...          ...          ...          ...  ...          78 

Vowel  Quantity,             ...          ...         ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...         79 

Linked  Symbols, 

Governing  Signs,           ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...          ib. 

Analysis  of  Mixed  Symbols  and  Optional  Extension  of  the  Principle,  ...          82 

Tones, ib. 

Modulated  Whisper,       ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...          8G 

APPLICATION  OF  VISIBLE  SPEECH  TO  LANGUAGES. 

The  Elementary  Sounds  of  Languages,            ...          ...          ...          ...  ...         91 

Letter- Value  of  the  Principal  Consonant  Symbols,     ...          ...          ...  ...         93 

Letter- Value  of  the  Principal  Symbols  for  Vowels  and  Glides,          ...  ...         94 

Modes  of  Teaching  the  Universal  Alphabet,    ...          ...          ...          ...  ...         96 

Typography  of  Visible  Speech,             ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...         98 

Visible  Speech  Writing,  100 

Visible  Speech  Telegraphy,       ...          ...          ...          ...          ...          ...  ...       102 

Practical  Tests, 104 

Alphabetic  Vocabulary  of  Test- words  (Initial  Vowels,)           ...          ...  ...        105 

VISIBLE  SPEECH  APPLIED  TO  ENGLISH. 

Table  of  English  Elements, 110 

English  Pronunciation,              ...          ...          ...         ...          ...         ...  ...       Ill 

Sounds  of  English  Letters  and  Orthographies  of  English  Sounds,    ...  ...          ib. 

Tendencies  of  English  Pronunciation,              ...         ...         ...         ...  ...       116 

English  Characteristics,              ...         ...          ..           ...          ...         ...  ...       117 

Syllabic  Analysis,           ...          ...          ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  ...        118 

Outline  course  of  Lessons  for  Teaching  the  Illiterate  to  Read,          ...  ...       120 

Mode  of  Deducing  Foreign  Sounds  from  their  Symbols,        ...         ...  ...       124 

Note  on  the  Zulu  Clicks,           ...         ...          ...         ...         ...          ...  ...       125 

P  L  AT  E  S. 

Alphabetic  Vocabulary  of  Test- Words  (Initial  Consonants),           .         .  I.  II.  III. 
Interjectional  and  Inarticulate  Sounds,  and  Dialectic  Pronunciations  of 

Numerals,    ...........  IV. 

Test  Sentences, — Scottish,  English,  and  Miscellaneous  Dialects,    .         .  V.   VI. 

Foreign-English,  and  Foreign  Sentences,       ......  VII. 

Shakpperian  English, — Portia's  Speech  on  Mercy ;  &c.           .         .         .  VIII. 

Acts,  Chap.  xxvi.          .         .                   .                   IX.   X.  XI. 

Visible  Speech  Writing,— The  Alphabet,       .          .                             .  XII. 
St.  John,  Chap.  xiv.     ...                                     .                            XIII.  XIV.   XV. 

The  Lord's  Prayer,  in  Capital,  Lower-Case,  and  Script  Alphabets,           .  XV. 

I  Corinthians,  Chap.  xiii.      .                   .         .                   ....  XVI. 


PREFACE. 

THE  scientific  interest  attaching  to  the  Invention  of  VISIBLE  SPEECH  has  alone 
induced  me  to  consent  to  the  publication  of  the  System  under  Copyright.  My 
desire  was,  that  this  Invention  —the  applications  of  which  are  as  universal  as 
speech  itself — should  at  its  inauguration  have  been  made  free  from  all  restric- 
tions ;  but  my  endeavours  to  effect  an  arrangement  for  this  purpose  have  been 
frustrated. 

I  wish  to  put  on  record  here  a  statement  of  the  facts  concerning  my  offer 
of  the  Invention  to  the  British  Government,  and  the  reception  of  the  offer. 

The  proposition  made  was  to  the  effect  that — If  the  expense  of  casting 
the  new  Types  and  publishing  the  Theory  of  the  System  should  be  defrayed 
from  Public  resources,  I  would,  on  this  simple  condition,  relinquish  pro  bono 
pnblico  all  copyright  in  the  Explanatory  Work,  as  well  as  all  exclusive  property 
in  the  System  and  its  applications,  in  order  that  the  use  of  the  Universal 
Alphabet  might  be  as  free  as  that  of  common  letters  to  all  persons.  I  made 
no  stipulation  for  personal  recompense  ;  nor  was  the  acceptance  of  the  offer 
asked,  save  as  the  result  of  a  satisfactory  examination  of  the  System.  The 
primary  proposition  was  therefore  specifically  limited  to  a  request  for  an 
authorized  investigation,  the  result  of  which  should  decide  the  question  of 
publication. 

This  request  was  made  in  vain.  The  subject  did  not  lie  within  the  province 
of  any  of  the  existing  State  Departments,  and  the  Memorial  was,  on  this  ground, 
politely  bowed  out  from  one  after  the  other  of  the  Executive  Offices. 

The  proposition  was,  no  doubt,  an  exceptional  one — but  so  is  the  Invention. 
Even  the  idea  which  it  realizes  is  entirely  new  ;  the  idea,  namely,  of  representing 
the  mechanism  of  speech-sounds  in  their  alphabetical  symbols.  It  was  a  matter 
of  course  that  such  a  subject  could  not  have  been  included  in  the  established 
routine  of  any  Department. 

Does  not  the  fact  that  an  offer  of  such  a  nature  failed  to  obtain  a  hearing, 
indicate  a  national  want — the  want  namely  of  some  functionary  whose  business 
it  should  be  to  investigate  new  measures  of  any  kind  which  may  be  presented 
for  the  benefit  of  society  ? 


Before  offering  the  Invention  of  Visible  Speech  to  Government,  I  had  sub- 
jected the  System  to  a  crucial  variety  of  practical  and  public  tests,  so  that  a 
fair  prima  facie  case  had  been  made  out  to  justify  even  so  unheard-of  a  thing 
as  investigation  by  a  Royal  Commission.  But  credentials  could,  of  course,  have 
no  weight  when  the  ground  of  rejection  was  that  of  inability  to  take  '  official 
cognizance'  of  the  subject. 

This  very  unsatisfactory  reason  for  neglecting  an  offer,  which  I  was  not  alone 
in  thinking  both  liberal  and  patriotic,  as  well  as  sufficiently  important  for  recog- 
nition, induced  me,  before  issuing  the  Circular  announcing  the  present  publica- 
tion, to  make  a  final  appeal  to  Her  Majesty's  Prime  Minister,  specifying  the 
amount  to  which  the  requisite  grant  for  inaugural  expenses  might  be  limited. 
The  following  was  his  Lordship's  reply  : 

"  10  Downing  Street,  Whitehall, 

February  12,  1867. 

Sir, — I  am  directed  by  Lord  Derby  to  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  your  letter 
of  the  8th  instant,  and  to  inform  you  that  there  are  no  public  funds  from  which 
he  can  make  you  the  grant  you  desire. 

I  have  the  honour  to  be,  Sir, 

Your  obedient  Servant, 
A.  Melville  Bell,  Esq.  W.  P.  TALBOT." 

This  was  at  all  events  definite  ;  and  the  fact  of  there  being  no  available 
'  public  funds '  for  such  a  purpose,  certainly  furnished  sufficient  reason  for  denial. 
But  the  fact  is,  nevertheless,  remarkable.  The  price  of  a  piece  of  ordnance,  and 
a  few  barrels  of  gunpowder — the  cost  of  an  every-day  experiment  in  target- 
firing — ought  surely  to  have  been  forthcoming  from  some  '  public  fund  '  for  the 
advancement  of  one  of  the  foremost  Arts  of  Peace. 

The  choice  was  now  left  but  between  two  alternatives  :  either  to  withhold 
the  Invention,  or  to  publish  it  under  copyright ; — in  the  latter  case,  to  impose 
local  restrictions  on  what  was  in  its  nature  universal ;  in  the  former  case,  to 
render  nugatory  the  results  of  a  long  labour.  For  the  System  was  of  course 
worthless  while  unpublished. 

Having  put  my  hand  to  the  plough,  I  would  not  turn  back — 

'  Aut  non  tentaris  aut  perfice ?- 
I  therefore  accepted  the  obligation  which  this  '  Inaugural  Edition'  fulfils. 


IX 


The  time  will,  I  hope,  come  when  the  Chamberses  and  Cassells  of  Litera- 
ture will  be  able  to  issue  their  penny  sheets  in  the  new  type  to  convert  the 
unlettered  millions  in  all  countries  into  readers.  But  the  System  cannot  be 
popularized  by  the  present  theoretical,  and,  necessarily,  expensive  Work.  My 
sole  object  here  is  to  communicate  the  System  as  the  basis  of  a  new  science  of 
UNIVERSAL  ALPHABETICS. 

The  investigation  which  was  vainly  sought  for  from  pre-occupied  States- 
men, can  now  be  made  at  leisure  by  the  scientific  world.  If  its  judgment  be 
favourable  to  the  adoption  of  this  scheme  for  macadamizing  the  linguistic  high- 
ways between  nations,  the  requisite  facilities  may  ultimately  be  made  available  ; 
but,  in  the  meantime,  the  offer  to  relinquish  copyright  is  withdrawn,  and  all 
rights  of  reproduction,  translation,  &c.,  are  reserved. 

'  My  previous  proposal  for  an  unrestricted  publication  renders  this  definite 
intimation  of  the  reservation  of  copyright  necessary  to  prevent  mistakes. 

The  unavoidable  effect  in  this  peculiar  case  will  unfortunately  be,  to  retard 
the  popular  promulgation  of  this  System  of  Letters  in  the  country  of  its  birth, 
while  in  countries  where  the  rights  of  foreign  authors  are  disregarded,  the 
System  may  be  at  once  brought  freely  into  use.  This  result  was,  however,  duly 
pointed  out,  and  the  anomaly  was  sought  to  be  prevented. 

Persons  who  may  be  desirous  of  bringing  any  part  of  the  System  into 
practical  application,  by  publications  or  otherwise,  will  be  enabled  to  do  so, 
under  conditions  which  may  be  mutually  arranged. 

The  symbols  appear  at  some  disadvantage,  from  the  comparative  coarseness 
of  the  experimental  types,  and  also  in  the  absence  of  illustration  from  '  lower 
case '  letters.  The  aspect  of  the  symbols  in  the  latter  form  may  be  judged  of 
by  the  lithographed  specimens  at  the  end  of  the  volume  ;  but  letters  individually 
drawn  by  hand  want  the  clearness,  compactness,  and  uniformity  of  typographs. 
Letter-press  exemplification  was  not  contemplated  when  the  Prospectus  of 
this  Work  was  issued — lithographic  illustration  only  having  been  intended  ;  but 
in  the  development  of  the  System  for  publication,  a  constant  reference  to  Plates 
was  felt  to  be  an  intolerable  inconvenience — to  the  Student  of  the  System  the 
inconvenience  would  have  been  even  greater ; — and  therefore  a  fount  of  types 
to  work  with  the  common  letter-press  has  been  extemporized. 

The  new  letters — as  shown  in  this  work — are  all  of  equal  height,  and  they 
consequently  have  the  effect  of  CAPITALS.  The  'lower  case'  letters,  it  will  be  seen, 
possess  an  additional  element  of  perspicuity,  from  the  ascending  and  descending 


lines  of  the  vowels.  The  'capital'  form  has  simply  been  preferred  for  the  pre- 
sent purpose,  because  of  the  larger  scale  which  it  allowed  for  the  exhibition  of 
the  organic  symbols. 

A  system  of  this  nature  would  be  much  more  easily  explained  orally  than 
in  print.  This  inherent  difficulty  arises  from  the  impossibility  of  communicating 
an  exact  knowledge  of  sounds  before  the  appropriate  symbols  of  the  System 
are  understood.  An  hour  of  viva  vocc  instruction  would  save  the  majority  of 
Students  many  hours  of  uncertain  reading,  and  enable  them  to  commence  at 
once  with  the  Symbols,  instead  of  having  first  to  gather  a  general  knowledge  of 
the  basis  of  the  System,  by  the  perusal  of  preliminary  explanations. 

On  this  account  I  recommended  that,  in  connection  with  the  Inaugural 
Publication  from  public  resources,  which  was  originally  proposed,  a  temporary 
arrangement  should  be  added  for  giving  the  benefit  of  oral  exemplifications  to 
the  first  learners.  A  weekly  or  bi-weekly  free  Lecture  in  connection  with  the 
'  Science  and  Art  Department'  at  South  Kensington  would  have  started  a  large 
number  of  learners  pleasantly  over  initiatory  difficulties. 

In  developing  the  theory  in  the  following  pages,  I  have  endeavoured  so  to 
arrange  the  matter  that  a  general  knowledge  of  the  essentials  of  the  System 
may  be  gathered  from  the  Tables  and  Diagrams  alone.  (See  pages  35  to  41). 
These  are,  however,  supplemented  by  a  full  detail  of  Explanations  and  Illustra- 
tions, to  which  reference  will  of  course  be  made  as  required. 

The  reader  will  bear  in  mind,  that  all  the  phenomena  of  Universal  Speech 
are  included  in  this  Work.  He  must  not  suppose  that  the  varied  and  minute 
distinctions  of  the  System  require  to  be  mastered  by  every  learner.  The 
youngest  child  may  be  taught  to  read  from  the  Symbols — of  course,  without 
any  theoretical  knowledge.  A  full  understanding  of  the  Theory  is  essential 
only  to  Teachers  and  Symbolizers—  or  writers  of  sounds  at  hearing. 

In  presenting  the  System  with  the  requisite  completeness  for  all  purposes, 
I  have  found  it  difficult— with  so  much  of  necessary  detail  to  be  communicated 
— to  preserve  the  aspect  of  simplicity.  But  the  learner  will  discover  the  real 
simplicity  of  the  Symbolization  in  connection  with  the  known  sounds  of  his 
own  language  ;  and  wrhen  he  has  mastered  vernacular  reading,  foreign  varieties 
of  sound  will  present  little  or  no  difficulty. 

A.   M.   B. 

London,  N.  W. 
1 8  Harrington  Square,  August,  1867. 


VISIBLE     SPEECH 


POPULAR   DESCRIPTION   OF  THE   ORGANS   OF   SPEECH. 


THE  lungs  constitute  the  bellows  of  the  speaking  machine  ;  the  larynx,  the 
pharynx,  the  soft  palate,  the  nose,  and  the  mouth,  modify  the  breath  into  the 
elementary  sounds  of  speech. 

The  lungs  are  enclosed  within  the  chest,  and  in  healthful  respiration  they 
are  acted  on  chiefly  by  upward  pressure  of  the  diaphragm,  or  midriff,  which 
separates  the  chest  from  the  abdomen.  In  faulty  respiration  the  sides  of  the 
chest  are  drawn  in  upon  the  lungs  to  force  out  the  breath,  and  the  natural  action 
of  the  diaphragm  is  reversed.  Stammerers  generally  exemplify  this  error. 

The  breath  driven  from  the  lungs  ascends  the  windpipe,  and  its  emission  is 
rendered  audible  only  by  the  resistance  which  it  meets  with  in  the  throat,  the 
nostrils,  or  the  mouth. 

On  the  top  of  the  windpipe  is  placed  the  larynx, — the  vocalizing  part  of 
the  speaking  machine.  The  larynx  is  practically  a  box,  the  cavity  of  which  is 
susceptible  of  a  multitude  of  modifications  affecting  the  pitch  of  the  voice.  The 
orifice  of  the  larynx — the  glottis — may  be  perfectly  closed,  fully  expanded,  or 
contracted  in  any  degree. 

When  the  whole  of  the  guttural  passage  is  fully  expanded,  the  passing- 
breath  creates  no  sound  ;  but  when  the  glottis,  or  aperture  of  the  larynx,  is 
definitely  narrowed,  its  edges  vibrate  and  produce  the  sound  which  is  called  voice. 
Voice  is  thus  the  mechanical  result  of  vibration  of  the  edges  of  the  glottis. 
These  latter  have,  from  this  cause,  received  the  name  of  the  'vocal  ligaments." 

B 


12 

Above  the  glottis,  and  forming  part  of  the  larynx,  is  what  may  be  con- 
sidered as  a  pair  of  lips,  the  aperture  between  which  is  called  the  '  superior,'  or 
'  false  glottis.'  The  latter,  and  the  passage  between  the  larynx  and  the 
mouth,  are  susceptible  of  a  variety  of  changes  of  shape  and  expansion.  A 
moderate  degree  of  contraction  gives  the  breath  the  rustling  quality  called 
'  whisper  ;'  and  a  greater  contraction,  with  a  strong  current  of  breath,  creates 
the  resonant  but  non-vocal  vibration,  which  will  be  understood  by  the  term 
'  growling.' 

The  passage  between  the  larynx  and  the  mouth  is  called  the  pharynx. 
This  cavity  is  susceptible  of  various  degrees  of  expansion  and  contraction  ;  and 
these  modifications  of  the  pharynx,  assisted  by  the  position  of  the  pendulous 
soft  palate,  play  an  important  part  in  the  formation  of  the  elements  of  speech. 

The  percussive  effect  of  consonants  results  mainly  from  the  elasticity  of 
the  muscles  of  the  pharynx,  which  compress  the  breath  behind  the  articulating 
organs  in  proportion  as  the  latter  restrain  its  issue  through  the  mouth.  In 
forming  vowels,  the  pharynx  is  for  one  set  of  sounds,  partially,  and  for  another 
set  fully,  expanded. 

In  front  of  the  pharynx  is  the  mouth  ;  and  at  the  top  of  the  pharynx,  behind 
the  soft  palate,  is  the  entrance  to  the  nasal  passages.  When  the  soft  palate  is 
raised,  it  prevents  the  breath  from  passing  into  the  nose,  and  when  it  is  depressed, 
the  breath  flows  through  the  nostrils  as  well  as  into  the  mouth. 

The  soft  palate  acts  the  part  of  a  double  valve,  closing  the  nasal  passage 
by  upward  pressure,  and  closing  the  mouth  by  downward  contact  with  the 
tongue.  Both  passages  are  shut  in  this  manner  in  forming  the  consonant  K  ; 
the  oral  passage  is  closed  and  the  nasal  passage  open  in  forming  NG  ;  both 
passages  are  open  in  forming  the  French  /;/,  on,  &c.  ;  and  the  oral  passage  is 
open  and  the  nasal  passage  shut  in  forming  vowels. 

The  roof  of  the  mouth  is  an  arch  ;  and  the  tongue,  as  its  various  parts, — 
the  back,  the  front,  or  the  point, — are  presented  to  the  back,  the  front,  or  the 
rim  of  the  palatal  arch,  or  the  upper  gum,  gives  a  great  variety  of  configurations 
to  the  channel  of  the  mouth.  From  each  of  these  configurations  the  passino- 
breath  or  voice  receives  an  audibly  different  effect,  of  vowel  or  of  consonant 
quality.  Further  modifications  result  from  the  degree  of  contraction  of  the 
lips,  the  condition  of  the  guttural  passage,  &c. 

In  forming  CONSONANTS,  the  breath  or  voice  is  stopped  or  sqticezcd,  with  an 
effect  of  percussion,  sibilation,  buzzing,  or  vibration,  in  some  part  of  the  guttural 


13 

or  oral  passage  ;  and  in  forming  VOWELS,  the  breath  or  voice  flows  through 
similar  but  more  open  and  '  fixed'  configurations,  which  merely  shape  or  mould 
the  breath,  without  impeding  its  emission. 

The  following  Diagram  shows  the  relative  position  of  the  various  organs  : — 


DIAGRAM    OF   THE   ORGANS    OF   SPEECH. 


1.  The  Larynx. 

2.  The  Pharynx. 

3.  The  Soft  Palate. 

4.  The  action  of  the  Soft  Palate  in 

closing  the  Nasal  Passage. 


5.  The  Back  of  the  Tongue. 

6.  The  Front  of  the  Tongue. 

7.  The  Point  of  the  Tongue. 

8.  The  Lips. 


14 


THE   INVENTION   OF   VISIBLE    SPEECH. 

THE  system  of  Visible  Speech  was  elaborated  slowly  during  the  course  of  a 
great  many  years.  In  1849,  the  Author  wrote,  in  his  '  Principles  of  Speech,' 
having  reference  only  to  English  sounds  : — '  It  would  really  be  a  matter  of  but 
little  difficulty  to  reconstruct  our  alphabet,  and  furnish  it  with  invariable  marks 
for  every  appreciable  variety  of  vocal  and  articulate  sound.  So  few  as  twelve 
radical  letters  might  be  made  to  represent  all  the  English  articulations  (con- 
sonants.) Thus  :  we  have  twelve  forms  of  articulative  action,  most  of  which 
do,  and  all  of  which  may,  modify  both  voice  and  breath,  so  producing  twenty- 
four  elements  of  speech.  Let  some  uniform  change  to  represent  breath  and  voice 
be  made  on  each  of  the  twelve  characters,  and  these  twenty-four  varieties  of 
articulate  sound  may  be  not  only  fully  represented,  but  with  a  natural  analogy 
and  consistency  which  would  explain  to  the  eye  their  organic  relations. 

'  A  further  uniform  change  made  on  those  letters  which  have  a  nasal  cor- 
respondent, would  complete  the  scheme,  and  with  perfect  analogy  between  marks 
and  sounds,  exhibit,  by  twelve  radical  letters,  every  articulation  in  our  language. 

'  Some  equally  simple  and  analogical  notation  might  be  arranged  for  the 
vowels,  on  the  principle  of  their  sequence ;  so  that  a  really  scientific  alphabet 
could  be  easily  constructed.' 

The  practicability  of  extending  this  mode  of  representation  to  all  possible 
sounds,  was  conceived  and  ultimately  became  a  persistent  idea.  But  the 
necessary  pre-requisite  for  carrying  out  the  idea  was  to  obtain  a  knowledge  of 
the  exact  relations  of  sounds,  and  the  conditions  to  which  they  owed  their 
differences.  This  knowledge  could  only  be  acquired  from  observation  and 
experiment.  For  these,  fortunately,  opportunities  were  abundant. 

Professional  pursuits  directly  favoured  the  investigation,  by  furnishing  a 
constant  variety  of  examples  for  study  and  corroboration  ;  and  year  by  year  the 
subject  grew  in  interest,  and  was  unceasingly  prosecuted.  Gradually  the  cate- 
gory of  known  sounds  increased,  and  their  mutual  relations  became  more  and 
more  definite.  Still,  so  recently  as  1862,  when  a  new  edition  of  the  'Principles 
of  Speech''-  was  called  for,  the  Author  had  not  advanced  beyond  his  original 
triple  scale  of  voAvels,  consisting  of  the  three  classes, 

L  ingtt  al,       L  abio-L  ingnal,       Labial ; 

•;"  Principles  of  Speech  and  Cure  of  Stammering-.     London  :  Hamilton,  Adams  &  Co. 


15 

the  first  series  starting  with  the  close  ee  ;  the  third  with  the  close  do,  and  the 
intermediate  with  the  German  ii  ;  and  each  series  terminating  in  the  most  open 
vowel  ah. 

The  classification  of  vowels  on  this  basis  included  twenty-two  varieties  ; 
but  the  scheme  was  acknowledged  to  be  far  from  complete  for  the  representation 
of  other  than  European  languages  : — 

"  The  plasticity  of  the  organs  which  modify  voice  is  so  great,  that  there 
may  be  many  other  shades  of  sound  heard  in  other  languages."* 

"  The  plasticity  of  the  organs  is  so  great,  that  shades  of  vowel  quality  are 
endless,  arising  from  infinitesimal  differences  in  the  relative  positions  of  the  lips 
and  the  tongue.  The  number  of  possible  varieties  can  as  little  be  estimated  as 
the  number  of  possible  shades  of  colour. "f 

The  expectation  of  ultimate  success  in  the  construction  of  a  complete 
Physiological  Alphabet,  on  the  principle  of  Elementary  Relations,  was  now, 
however,  fully  entertained  : — 

"  In  this  way  a  system  of  notation  might  be  constructed  by  which  all  the 
sounds  of  any  dialect  might  be  represented  intelligibly  to  readers  of  whatever 
country  or  tongue.  A  Table  of  all  recognized  elements  of  speech  on  this 
natural  principle  of  arrangement  would  be  one  step  toward  the  realization  of 
that  indefinite  philological  speculation, — a  universal  language.''^ 

The  number  of  sounds  that  had  been  by  this  time  clearly  discerned  as  they 
were  experimentally  produced,  was  perplexing  ;  the  more  so  that  some  of  them 
could  not  be  made  to  fit  into  either  of  the  three  classes  in  the  scale.  This  led  to 
the  conclusion  that  the  framework  of  the  Vowel  Table  was  at  fault,  and  quires  of 
paper  were  covered  with  attempts  at  new  arrangements  which  might  incorporate 
the  excluded  elements. 

One  sound — that  of  the  English  err,  sir,  &c. — was  confessedly  out  of  place 
in  the  published  Table,  but  the  Table  evidently  did  not  contain  a  place  where 
the  sound  could  be  satisfactorily  located.  This  sound  haunted  the  ear  and  the 
mouth  by  day  and  night,  '  seeking  rest  but  finding  none  ;'  and  with  it  flitted  a 
train  of  obviously  kindred  sounds,  clamouring  for  recognition.  Among  them 
were  an  American  sound  heard  in  the  words  err,  sir,  &c.,  very  different  from  the 
ordinary  English  sound  in  the  same  words,  yet  having  some  features  of  family 
resemblance  ;  the  French  vowel  in  '  que,'  and  the  obscure  sounds  of  the  English 


*  1840  edition,  p.  28.         f  1863  edition,  p.  27.         t  1863  edition,  p.  32. 


articles  'a'  and   'the;'  all  of  which   were  felt  to  be   mutually  related  in  some 
undiscovered  way. 

The  revisal  of  the  '  Principles  of  Speech'  had  re-opened  the  whole  question 
of  elementary  relations,  and  the  experimental  classifications  which  followed, 
resulted  in  the  identification  of  a  new  category  of  vowels, — a  series  moulded 
simultaneously  by  the  back  and  the  front  surfaces  of  the  tongue.  Next,  the 
discovery  that  these  sounds  were  each  susceptible  of  labial  modification,  corres- 
ponding to  that  of  ii  (on  the  'high  front'  vowel  ee,)  revealed  the  principle  that 
the  so-called  Labial  Vowels  were  all,  in  reality,  compound  formations,  in  which  a 
definite  lingual  quality  was  involved.  The  analysis  of  the  English  vowels  oo,  <?,  and 
aw,  by  removal  of  labial  modification,  cleared  away  the  whole  remaining  mystery. 

It  was  evident  that  there  were  three  classes  of  purely  lingual  vowels, 
moulded  respectively  by  the  back,  the  front,  and  by  'mixed'  back  and  front 
positions  of  the  tongue  ;  and  that  each  element  in  this  triple  scale  was  the  basis 
of  another  vowel,  in  forming  which  a  definite  labial  modification  was  simply 
added.  There  were  then  six  sets  of  vowels  instead  of  three,  as  formerly  sup- 
posed, one  half  being  labialized  or  'rounded'  forms  of  the  other  half. 

The  longitudinal  division  of  the  tongue  into  three  principal  sections,  as  after- 
wards explained,  suggested  a  corresponding  tri-partition  of  the  aperture  between 
the  tongue  and  the  palate,  according  to  the  '  high,'  '  mid,'  or  '  low '  position  of 
the  tongue  ;  and  the  nine  points  thus  obtained  furnished  the  means  of  noting,  as 
by  lines  of  latitude  and  longitude,  the  precise  place  of  any  vowel  in  the  mouth. 

The  arrangement  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  Diagram,  in  which 
the  letters  a  b  c,  &c.,  stand  for  vowel  sounds  :— 


Back. 

Mixed. 

Fro, 

High, 

a 

d 

g 

Mid, 

b 

e 

h 

Loiv 

c 

f 

i 

These  nine  fixed  points  enabled  minor  degrees  to  be  measured  from  them 
by  simple  diacritic  signs  for  'inner,'  'outer,'  'higher,'  and  'lower'  positions; 
so  that  the  absolute  representative  power  of  the  principle  extended  to  nine 
degrees  of  horizontal  and  nine  of  vertical  measurement. 

This  power  of  discrimination  was  enormously  in  excess  of  all  possible 
necessity  ;  and  it  was  found  that  the  cardinal  degrees  were  amply  sufficient  for 

b 

all  practical  purposes,  in  connection  with  another  distinction  which  now  rev 


17 

itself :  the  distinction  between  Primary  Vowels  or  those  most  allied  to  Conson- 
ants, and  Wide  Vowels  or  those  in  forming  which  the  pharynx  or  guttural 
passage  is  fully  expanded.  Each  of  the  lingual  positions  furnished  both  a 
primary  and  a  wide  vowel,  so  that  the  scale  was  fixed  for  purposes  of  notation 
at  nine  primary  and  nine  wide  vowels,  formed  exclusively  by  the  tongue. 

No  instance  has  occurred  in  the  experimental  writing  of  languages  in  which 
the  minor  distinctions  of  '  inner,'  '  outer,'  '  higher',  or  '  lower'  positions  have  been 
necessary  ;  but  these  discriminations  are  still  available  should  they  be  required. 

All  the  wandering  vowels  were  now  provided  for ;  and  as  each  sound  fell 
into  its  proper  place,  its  neighbour-sounds  took  up  their  positions  with  perfect 
harmony.  The  framework  of  the  scale  was,  however,  larger  than  the  number  of 
known  sounds  could  fill ;  but  the  gaps  which  remained  here  and  there  showed 
the  exact  places  of  other  possible  varieties ;  and  experiment  proved  that  the 
missing  sounds  could  all  be  produced  by  organic  arrangements  corresponding 
with  the  theoretical  classification.  In  fact,  any  desired  sound,  known  or 
unknown,  could  be  produced  at  pleasure  by  first  adjusting  the  organs  tentatively 
for  its  neighbour-sounds,  and  then  allowing  these  to  coalesce,  as  it  were,  into  an 
intermediate. 

The  most  perfect  facility,  too,  was  found  in  evoking  in  this  way,  totally 
unheard  vowels  from  the  organs  of  other  persons  ;  and  this  fact  led  to  the 
discovery, — which  had  not  hitherto  been  reached, — that  the  scheme,  thus 
demonstrably  Physiological,  solved  the  problem  of  a  UNIVERSAL  ALPHABET. 

A  new  stimulus  was  thus  given  to  the  prosecution  of  the  subject,  and  the 
Consonants  were  investigated  in  the  light  shed  on  the  oral  actions  by  the 
Vowel  Scales. 

The  Consonants  were  much  more  easily  classified,  as  their  organic  formation 
was  more  obvious ;  and  former  results  had  left  comparatively  little  to  be  done 
in  order  to  form  a  correspondingly  complete  scale.  An  important  discovery 
was,  however,  made  in  tabulating  these  elements  :  their  relation  to  the  various 
parts  of  the  Vowel  Scale  was  ascertained  ;  the  true  cause  of  consonantal,  as 
distinct  from  vowel  effect,  was  made  manifest,  and  a  New  Class  of  Elements, 
intermediate  to  vowels  and  consonants,  was  recognised.  These  '  glides/  or  true 
semi-vowels,  completed  the  scheme  of  Linguistic  Sounds,  joining  the  vowels  and 
consonants  into  one  harmonious  scale. 

The  classification  proved  its  own  completeness,  by  the  unbroken  catenation 
>f  the  sounds,  and  it  now  became  possible  to  indicate  with  absolute  precision  a 


18 

multitude  of  nice  discriminations  in  the  oral  adjustments,  from  each  of  which 
some  difference  of  phonetic  effect  necessarily  and  uniformly  resulted. 

If  it  were  but  possible  to  symbolise  these  distinctions  with  practicable 
simplicity,  the  resulting  alphabet  would  represent  not  merely  every  language, 
but  every  dialect,  and  even  every  idiosyncrasy  of  speech  ! 

Here  was  a  new  object  to  be  aimed  at, — grand  in  its  utility,  worthy  of  all 
effort  for  the  sake  of  science, — but  apparently  beyond  hope  of  success.  The 
Alphabetic  Conferences  held  in  London  in  1854, — under  the  presidency  of 
Chevalier  Bunsen,  the  Prussian  Ambassador, — and  attended  by  the  most  dis- 
tinguished philologists  of  several  countries,  had  declared  that — '  it  would  be 
useless  and  impossible  to  attempt  to  find  for  each  possible  variety  of  sound  a 
different  graphic  sign.'  Nevertheless,  these  learned  men  might  be  mistaken  ; 
they  certainly  did  not  comprehend  the  relations  of  the  sounds  of  speech  as  they 
had  now  been  ascertained.  Their  Conferences  were  fruitless,  from  the  avowed 
want  of  the  requisite  'Physiological  Basis'  for  a  complete  Alphabet.  Here  was 
the  '  Basis'  undoubtedly  laid.  The  Cosmopolitan  Graphic  Structure  might, 
after  all,  be  raised.  Pen,  ink,  and  paper,  cost  little  ;  '  the  labour  we  delight  in 
physics  pain  ;'  nil  desperandum  !  The  attempt  was  diligently  prosecuted. 

The  problem  was: — To  construct  a  Scheme  of  Symbols,  which  should 
embody  the  whole  classification  of  sounds,  and  make  each  element  of  speech 
shew  in  its  symbol  the  position  of  its  sound  in  the  organic  scale. 

The  adoption  of  letters  from  existing  alphabets  was  obviously  irreconcilable 
with  the  desired  conformity  of  symbol  to  sound.  There  were  six  sets  of  purely 
lingual  vowels  to  be  provided  for,  each  set  consisting  of  three  sounds,  dependent 
on  relative  difference  of  aperture  ;  besides  which,  there  were  corresponding  sets 
of  '  rounded/  or  labio-lingual  formations  ;  making  a  total  of  thirty-six  organi- 
cally distinct  simple  VOWELS.  There  were  also  the  CONSONANTS,  of  corres- 
ponding organic  classes  to  the  vowels,  with  all  their  nice  gradations  of  effect 
dependent  on  the  exact  point  of  contact  or  friction  ;  and  there  were  the  GLIDES 
allied  to  both  sets  of  elements. 

The  consideration  that  all  these  varieties  of  elementary  sound  resulted 
mainly  from  the  evolutions  of  a  single  organ — the  tongue — happily  suggested 
the  idea  of  representing  each  class  of  elements  by  a  SINGLE  RADICAL  SYMBOL  ; 
and  the  realization  of  this  idea  became  the  final  object  of  effort. 

Definiteness  of  aim  achieved  a  speedy  success.      The  result  was  c'       '  |or 


19 

beyond  hope  ;  the  MONO-SYMBOLIC  idea  being,  as  the  Reader  will  perceive, 
carried  out  in  every  part  of  the  Scheme,  for  vowels,  consonants,  and  glides. 

In  the  early  part  of  1864,  the  New  System  of  Letters  was  completed,  and 
all  the  hitherto  undefined  'airy  nothings'  of  human  speech  received  each 

'  A  local  habitation  and  a  name. ' 

The  correlation  of  the  Sounds  and  Symbols  rendered  the  latter  SELF- 
INTERPRETING  to  those  who  possessed  the  key  to  the  symbolism,  and  so 
converted  the  UNIVERSAL  ALPHABET,  which  had  been  the  object  of  the 
designer,  into  a  real  VISIBLE  SPEECH  ; — the  latter  constituting,  in  fact,  a  new 
Science, — adapted  for  the  use  of  all  mankind  ! 

The  Invention  was  without  delay  brought  to  the  test  of  public  experiments 
in  the  Writing  of  Languages.  The  Inventor's  Sons  acquired  a  perfect  know- 
ledge of  the  System  in  a  few  days,  and  were  enabled  to  pronounce,  at  sight, 
the  most  difficult  and  peculiar  words  that  could  be  selected  from  the  Eastern 
and  other  Languages  ;  involving  often  combinations  of  sound  which  the  readers 
had  never  heard  before  their  own  organs  gave  them  utterance. 

Practical  success  having  been  thus  demonstrated  and  certified  by  the 
Linguists  who  had  dictated  the  experimental  tests,*  the  System  was  forthwith 
offered  to  the  British  Government  for  publication  without  Copyright,  as  a  gift 
to  the  Nation  and  the  world  :  the  only  condition  being,  that  the  cost  of  casting 
the  new  Types,  and  communicating  the  Theory  of  the  System,  should  be 
defrayed  from  public  resources.  The  result  may  be  seen  in  the  Preface. 

The  entire  System  of  Visible  Speech  has,  before  publication,  been  written 
above  a  score  of  times  on  various  plans,  with  the  view  of  securing  the  utmost 
simplicity  and  perspicuity  in  presenting  its  principles.  It  is  hoped  that  these 
qualities  will  be  manifest  in  the  ultimate  draft  which  is  now  submitted  to  the 
public.  The  Invention  having  also  undergone  close  revision  in  all  its  details  at 
each  transcription,  as  well  as  having  been  made  the  subject  of  constant  experi- 
ment during  the  years  that  have  elapsed  since  its  completion,  is  now,  it  is 
believed,  perfect  for  its  purposes,  and  will  probably  be  found  to  require  no 
additions  or  alterations,  however  extended  its  uses  may  become. 

Among  the  special  uses  of  '  Visible  Speech,'  the  following  may  be 
indicated  : — 

*  For  a  record  of  the  experiments,  see  Pamphlet  'Visible  Speech, — A  New  Fact  Demonstrated.'   London: 
Hamilton,  Adams  &  Co. 

~  C 


20 

SPECIAL   USES   OF    THE   INVENTION   OF   VISIBLE   SPEECH. 

I.  The  teaching  of  the  ILLITERATE  in  all  countries  to  read  their  Vernacular, 
Tongue  in  a  few  days. 

The  certainty  of  accomplishing  this  result  should  incite  philanthropic 
societies  and  individuals  to  the  most  widely  sustained  efforts  for  the  enlighten- 
ment of  the  '  latent  tracts'  of  communities.  The  worst  vices  of  society  are 
undoubtedly  nurtured  in  ignorance. 

II.  The  teaching  of  the  BLIND  to  read. 

The  small  number  of  radical  forms,  and  the  distinct  tangibility  of  differences 
of  position  of  the  same  form,  render  the  Symbols  of  Visible  Speech  peculiarly 
adapted  for  this  purpose. 

III.  The  teaching  of  the  DEAF  AND  DUMB  to  speak. 

In  this  department,  very  striking  results  may  be  confidently  anticipated. 
The  Deaf  and  Dumb  possess  all  the  organs  of  speech,  and  only  require  to  be 
directed  visibly  in  their  use.  The  feeling  of  organic  action  will  probably  be 
developed  by  practice  to  a  keenness  corresponding  to  that  which  the  sense  of 
touch  acquires  among  the  Blind. 

IV.  The  communication  of  the  exact  sounds  of  FOREIGN  LANGUAGES  to 
learners  in  all  countries. 

The  advantages  of  this  facility  will  be  experienced  in  connection  with  the 
Foreign  Services  abroad  ;  with  Geographical  and  other  Expeditions  ;  with 
Political  Embassies,  Christian  Missions,  Commerce,  General  Education,  &c. 

V.  The  establishment  of  a  STANDARD  of  the  NATIVE  PRONUNCIATION  of 
any  language. 

In  the  case  of  almost  every  language  this  is  a  desideratum,  the  want  of 
which  has  been  productive  of  great  domestic  and  international  inconvenience  ; 
and  the  supplying  of  this  want  will,  of  course,  achieve  a  corresponding  amount 
of  social  and  scholastic  benefit. 

VI.  The  Prevention  and  Removal  of  DEFECTS  and  IMPEDIMENTS  of  Speech. 
In   dealing  with   these,    '  knowledge '    of   the   mechanisms   of   speech    is, 

emphatically,    '  power'    of  correction.       Such    habits    should,    now  that   these 
mechanisms  have  been  plainly  revealed,  be  easily  and  certainly  prevented. 


21 

VII.  The  TELEGRAPHIC   communication  of   messages    in    any  language, 
through  all  countries,  without  translation. 

Visible  Speech  does  not  interfere  with  the  use  of  ordinary  alphabets  in 
literature,  &c.  ;  but  for  international  purposes  it  may  very  advantageously 
supplant  all  local  alphabets.  Roman  letters  have  been  fully  tried,  and  found 
sadly  wanting  in  Telegraphy. 

VIII.  The    study,    comparison,    and     preservation    of    fast-disappearing 
DIALECTS,  and  the  universal  tracing  of  the  AFFINITIES  OF  WORDS. 

The  Science  of  Etymology  has  been  hindered  by  nothing  more  than  by  the 
want  of  a  Universal  Alphabet.  Visible  Speech  furnishes  more  than  this,  or 
than  scholars  have  hitherto  dared  to  hope  for.  The  relations  of  sounds  will  now 
need  no  research  or  elaborate  disquisition,  as  every  relation,  whether  organic  or 
mechanical,  will  be  distinctly  legible  in  the  literal  Symbols  themselves.  The 
Science  of  Comparative  Philology  should  be  vastly  advanced  by  this  Invention. 

IX.  The  speedy  diffusion  of  the  language  of  a  mother  country  throughout 
the  most  widely  separated  COLONIES. 

This  is  only  one  among  many  similar  Political  benefits  to  be  derived  from 
the  New  System  of  Letters.  The  acquisition,  by  Rulers,  of  the  languages  of 
their  Colonial  Subjects,  will,  of  course,  be  facilitated  in  an  equal  degree. 

X.  The  world-wide  communication  of  any  specific  sounds  with  absolute 
uniformity  ;  and,  consequently,  the  possible  construction  and  establishment  of 
a   UNIVERSAL   LANGUAGE. 

Without  such  a  medium  of  self-interpreting  letters,  the  establishment  of  a 
Universal  Language  might  fairly  be  deemed  an  impossibility.  By  means  of 
Visible  Speech,  if  at  all,  this  Dream  of  Philosophers  will  be  realized.  The 
foundation  is  laid,  and  the  Linguistic  Temple  of  Human  Unity  may  at  some 
time,  however  distant  the  day,  be  raised  upon  the  earth. 

EXPERIMENTAL   APPLICATIONS   OF   VISIBLE   SPEECH. 

Since  the  Pamphlet  was  printed  in  which  the  earlier  experiments  in  appli- 
cation of  Visible  Speech  were  recorded,  the  list  of  Languages  from  which  tests 
have  been  furnished  has  become  much  more  extensive.  It  is  unnecessary  to 
swell  the  bulk  of  this  volume  with  fresh  citations.  There  has  been  no  single 
instance  of  failure  in  connection  either  with  the  sounds  of  Languages  or 


22 

Dialects,  or  in  the  writing  of  Arbitrary  peculiarities.  For  the  sake  of  showing 
the  mode  in  which  the  experiments  were  conducted,  the  following  description  is 
quoted  from  a  letter  to  the  '  Reader,'  by  Alexander  J.  Ellis,  Esq.,  F.R.S.  :— 

"  The  mode  of  procedure  was  as  follows  :  Mr  Bell  sent  his  two  Sons,  who 
were  to  read  the  writing,  out  of  the  room, — it  is  interesting  to  know  that  the 
elder,  who  read  all  the  words  in  this  case,  had  only  had  five  weeks'  instruction 
in  the  use  of  the  Alphabet, — and  I  dictated  slowly  and  distinctly  the  sounds 
which  I  wished  to  be  written.  These  consisted  of  a  few  words  in  Latin,  pro- 
nounced first  as  at  Eton,  then  as  in  Italy,  and  then  according  to  some  theoretical 
notions  of  how  the  Latins  might  have  uttered  them.  Then  came  some  English 
provincialisms  and  affected  pronunciations ;  the  words  '  how  odd,'  being  given 
in  several  distinct  ways.  Suddenly  German  provincialisms  were  introduced. 
Then  discriminations  of  sounds  often  confused,  ees,  is'  (Polish)  ;  eesh,  ich 
(German)  ;  ich  (Dutch)  ;  ich  (Swiss) ;  oul,  oni  (French)  ;  we  (English) ;  wie 
(German)  ;  vie  (French).  Some  Arabic,  some  Cockney-English,  with  an  intro- 
duced Arabic  guttural,  some  mispronounced  Spanish,  and  a  variety  of  shades 
of  vowels  and  diphthongs.  *  *  *  The  result  was  perfectly  satisfactory  ; — that 
is,  Mr  Bell  wrote  down  my  queer  and  purposely-exaggerated  pronunciations 
and  mispronunciations,  and  delicate  distinctions,  in  such  a  manner  that  his  Sons, 
not  having  heard  them,  so  uttered  them  as  to  surprise  me  by  the  extremely 
correct  echo  of  my  own  voice.  *  *  *  Accent,  tone,  drawl,  brevity,  indis- 
tinctness, were  all  reproduced  with  surprising  accuracy.  Being  on  the  watch,  I 
could,  as  it  were,  trace  the  alphabet  in  the  lips  of  the  readers.  I  think,  then,  that 
Mr  Bell  is  justified  in  the  somewhat  bold  title  which  he  has  assumed  for  his  mode 
of  writing — 'Visible  Speech.'  I  only  hope  that,  for  the  advantage  of  linguists, 
such  an  alphabet  may  be  soon  made  accessible,  and  that,  for  the  intercourse  of 
nations,  it  may  be  adopted  generally,  at  least  for  extra-European  nations,  as  for 
the  Chinese  dialects,  and  the  several  extremely  diverse  Indian  languages,  where 
such  an  alphabet  would  rapidly  become  a  great  social  and  political  engine." 

No  man  could  be  better  qualified  to  form  a  correct  judgement  in  reference 
to  these  experiments  than  the  eminent  Author  of  '  The  Essentials  of  Phonetics  ;' 
and  it  was  a  confidence  only  due  to  Mr  Ellis's  disinterestedness,  and  promptitude 
in  recognising  the  merits  of  Visible  Speech,  which  led  the  Author  to  invite  that 
Gentleman,  at  a  later  period,  to  inspect  the  Theoretical  details  of  the  Invention. 


23 

Mr  Ellis's  second  letter  to  the  '  Reader,'  (August  5th,  1865,)  descriptive  of  what 
he  now  knew  theoretically  as  well  as  practically,  is  subjoined  in  extenso : — 

"  In  your  number  for  September  3,  1864,  vol.  iv.,  page  303,  you  gave  insertion 
to  a  letter  which  I  addressed  to  you  concerning  Mr  Melville  Bell's  new  system 
of  expressing  speech-sounds  by  written  symbols.  I  had  then  been  favoured 
with  a  private  demonstration  of  its  capabilities,  which  I  had  tested  to  the  best 
of  my  power ;  and  I  was  able  to  give  a  most  satisfactory  report  to  that  extent. 
But  I  did  not  know  the  forms  of  the  letters,  or  what  each  individual  letter  repre- 
sented, or  how  they  were  to  be  combined,  or  what  was  the  theory  on  which  the 
extraordinary  results  I  witnessed  was  based  ;  and  I  was,  therefore,  obliged  to 
qualify  my  opinion.  Mr  Melville  Bell  and  his  two  Sons  have  now  been  kind 
enough  to  devote  several  hours  to  explaining  to  me  thoroughly  the  whole 
phonetic  theory  and  plan  of  symbolization,  and  to  read  and  exhibit  on  paper 
before  me  examples  of  its  use,  sufficiently  numerous  to  enable  me  to  form  a 
complete  judgement  of  its  powers  and  merits.  I  take  the  liberty,  therefore,  in 
the  interest  of  science,  to  complete  the  information  I  gave  you,  so  far  as  I  am 
at  liberty  to  do.  I  may  add,  that  I  have  no  sort  of  connexion,  pecuniary  or 
personal,  with  Mr  Melville  Bell's  scheme  ;  that  I  have  not  been  of  the  slightest 
assistance  to  him  in  its  construction  ;  and  that  persons  might  even  rather  suspect 
me  of  wishing  not  to  forward  a  scheme  which  will,  I  believe  and  hope,  thoroughly 
supersede  one  on  which  I  have  laboured  for  many  years,  and  expended  much 
money.  My  impressions  in  favour  of  Mr  Bell's  scheme  are  so  strong,  that  it  is 
necessary  for  me  to  guard  against  any  suspicion  of  being  biassed  in  giving  them 
expression. 

"As  I  write  I  have  a  full  and  distinct  recollection  of  the  labours  of  Amman 
(Surdus  Loquens,  1692 ;  Dissertatio  de  Loqueld,  i/ooj  ;  De  Kempelen  (Le 
Mecanisme  de  la  Parole,  1791 J  ;  Johannes  Miiller  (Handbuch  der  Physiologic, 
book  iv.,  sec.  3.,  Von  der  Stimme  und  Sprache,  German,  1834,  French,  by 
Jourdan  and  Littre,  1851^  ;  K.  M.  Rapp  (Versuch  einer  Physiologie  der  Sprache, 
4  vols.,  1836 — 1841^  ;  C.  R.  Lepsius  (Standard  Alphabet,  second  English  edition, 
1863,)  ;  E.  Briicke  (Grundzuge  der  Physiologie  und  Systematik  der  Sprachlaute, 
1856^1  ;  S.  S.  Haldeman  (Analytic  Orthography,  i86oj  ;  Max  Miiller  (Proposals 
for  a  Missionary  Alphabet,  prefixed  to  his  Survey  of  Languages,  1855  ;  Physio- 
logical Alphabet,  in  his  Lectures  on  the  Science  of  Language,  series  ii.,  lecture  3, 
1864,).  To  these  I  may  add  my  own  works  (The  AlpJiabet  of  Nature,  1845  ; 


24 

The  Essentials  of  Phonetics,  1848;  Universal  Writing  and  Printing,  1856^; 
together  with  a  host  of  other  works  of  more  or  less  pretension  and  value,  which 
it  would  be  too  long  to  enumerate.  The  above  treatises  contain,  perhaps,  a  com- 
plete account  of  the  present  state  of  phonetical  knowledge,  so  far  as  has  been 
published. 

"  Now,  it  is  with  this  full  and  distinct  recollection  of  works,  which  I  have  not 
only  read,  but  studied,  many  of  them  with  great  care  and  attention,  that  I  feel 
called  upon  to  declare  that,  until  Mr  Melville  Bell  unfolded  to  me  his  careful, 
elaborate,  yet  simple  and  complete  system,  I  had  no  knowledge  of  alphabetics  as  a 
science  Much  had  been  done.  The  mechanism  and  physiology  of  voice-sounds 
had  been  carefully  and  profoundly  studied.  Excellent  and  elaborate  attempts  at 
analyzing  speech-sounds  had  been  made.  Various  alphabets,  local  and  universal, 
had  been  planned.  Contributions  to  the  philosophy  of  alphabetics  of  great 
value,  indispensable  observations  and  experiments,  had  been  recorded  and 
many  more  are  doubtless  required.  But  alphabetics  as  a  science,  so  far  as  I  have 
been  able  to  ascertain — and  I  have  looked  for  it  far  and  wide — did  not  exist. 
We  did  not  know  what  elementary  sounds  or  modifications  of  sound  should  be 
expressed,  and  the  art  of  expressing  such  as  had  been  pretty  generally  received 
was  in  a  state  of  the  utmost  confusion.  I  should  be  loth  to  say  that  Mr  Melville 
Bell's  scientific  system  of  alphabetics  admits  of  no  improvement.  It  would  be 
strange  if  it  did  not.  But  it  has  all  the  present  appearance,  on  the  one  hand,  of 
satisfying  the  wants  of  science,  and,  on  the  other,  of  fulfilling  the  demands  of 
practice. 

"  Mr  Melville  Bell,  in  forming  an  alphabet,  rejected  all  existing  alphabets. 
They  were  all  formed  on  very  imperfect  knowledge,  or  superficial  observation. 
He  applied  himself  directly  to  the  organs  of  speech,  with  which  his  long  practice 
as  a  corrector  of  the  defects  of  utterance  had  rendered  him  familiar  in  all  their  re- 
lations. The  different  forms  of  the  glottis,  the  different  modes  of  driving  the 
air  from  the  lungs  and  the  passages  it  traversed,  the  various  ways  of  altering  or 
modifying  the  positions  assumed  by  the  organs  of  speech,  first  engaged  his 
attention  ;  and  the  skill  with  which  he  has  hit  upon  the  general  modifications,  is 
one  of  the  most  remarkable  parts  of  his  system,  leading  to  a  series  of  diacritic 
symbols  of  universal  applicability,  giving  an  almost  unlimited  power  of  express- 
ing shades  of  sound  and  peculiarities  of  utterance,  without  loading  the  memory 
of  the  reader  with  an  impossible  variety  of  literal  forms.  Next  came  the  con- 
sideration of  the  vowels,  and  their  treatment  is  at  once  complete  and  original. 


25 

The  size  and  shape  of  the  aperture  allowed  for  the  passage  of  vocalized  breath 
"  forms  the  basis  of  the  arrangement,  and  the  relations  of  the  apertures  thus 
formed,  with  their  modifications  at  either  extremity,  labial  and  pharyngal,  give 
a  philosophical  and,  indeed,  musical  scheme  of  the  relations  of  the  vowel  sounds. 
The  power  thus  obtained  of  showing,  by  the  very  form  of  the  symbol,  how  to 
produce  the  vowel  sound,  is  really  astonishing  to  those  whose  study  of  vowel 
sounds  has  shown  them  the  extreme  difficulty  of  conceiving  the  method  of 
uttering  or  imitating  them  when  spoken.  So  perfect  is  the  present  arrangement, 
that  a  simple  name  is  given  to  each  vowel  heard,  depending  entirely  on  the  shape 
and  modification  of  the  wind  passage,  by  which  its  power  is  conveyed  with  ease 
to  those  who  have  been  properly  instructed  in  the  meaning  of  the  words  em- 
ployed. The  numerous  examples  which  Mr  Melville  Bell  and  his  Sons  gave  me 
of  the  facility  with  which  delicate  distinctions  in  English  pronunciation — as,  for 
example,  between  the  vowels  in  shun  and  mention,  nest  and  goodness  ;  principle, 
principal,  and  principality — and  difficult  Scotch  and  Irish  dialectic  vowels,  could 
be  symbolized  and  understood,  were  most  interesting  and  satisfactory.  No 
approach  to  such  a  perfection  of  analysis  and  symbolization  of  the  vowels  has 
yet  fallen  under  my  notice.  Lastly  came  the  consonants ;  and  here,  too, 
although  they  have  been  generally  much  better  understood  than  the  vowels,  the 
treatment  is  very  original,  and  apparently  exhaustive.  I  need  only  allude  to  the 
method  of  marking  the  position  and  shape  of  the  tongue  with  respect  to  the 
palate,  and  the  general  modifications  whereby  the  great  variety  of  consonants 
thus  formed  is  reduced  to  a  rational  and  intelligible  order.  Nor  must  I  omit  to 
mention  the  mode  of  indicating  glide  sounds,  during  which  the  organs  change 
their  position,  and  which,  therefore,  assume  a  kind  of  middle  place  between 
consonants  and  vowels. 

"  As  it  would  be  impossible  to  give  illustrations,  the  above  general  remarks 
must  suffice  as  an  outline  of  the  theory.  To  those  who  endeavour  to  pick  up 
conceptions  of  speech-sounds  from  the  confused  accounts  of  ordinary  writers 
(which  are  certainly  sufficient  to  drive  one  to  despair  by  their  vagueness  and 
figurative  language,  differing  for  almost  each  country  and  each  traveller  or 
grammarian),  such  a  theory  may  seem  terribly  difficult.  But  treated  practically, 
by  one  who  thoroughly  understands  it,  it  will  be  found  extremely  easy.  There 
is  nothing  vague,  nothing  figurative.  Each  symbol,  and  each  part  of  a  symbol, 
has  a  meaning,  and  contains  a  direction  for  utterance.  They  are  ivords  of 
command,  which  any  raiv  recruit  can  obey  after  proper  drilling.  When  an 


26 

Englisman  talks  of  hard  and  soft  c,  he  has  a  meaning,  no  doubt ;  but  it  is  very 
different  from  what  an  Italian  or  Spaniard  would  understand.     What  does  a 
Saxon  mean  by  hard  and  soft,  when  he  calls  /  hard,  and  b  soft  ?    Something 
very  different.     What  are  the  thick  and  thin,  heavy  and  light  vowels  or  conson- 
ants of  different  nations  ?    These  words  evidently  do  not  tell  any  one  what  is  to 
be  done.     No  one  could  he  trained  by  them.     But  they  have  served  to  pervert 
men's  minds,  and  render  them  unable  to  describe  or  understand  a  real  description 
of  sound.     A  well-known  Orientalist,  the  other  day,  was  surprised  that  Mr  Bell 
could  not  write  a  sound  from  description,  which  the  describer  could  not  himself 
pronounce  ;  and  was  dissatisfied  by  having  his  own  utterance  of  another  sound 
photographed,  when  he  wished  to  hear  the  sound  of  his  conception.     All  this 
arises  from  extremely  imperfect  knowledge  of  certain  landmarks  of  sound  which 
Mr  Bell's  system,  when  properly  taught,  at  once  establishes.     But  it  will  not  teach 
itself;   owing  in  part  to  this  prevailing  ignorance,  and  in  part  to  varieties  of 
pronunciation  affecting  the  key-words.     If  Mr  Bell  were  to  publish  his  system 
as  a  book,   it  might  be  doomed  to  repose  on  the  same  shelf  with  the  Real 
Character  of  Bishop  Wilkins   (which  also  contains  an  admirable  analysis  of 
speech-sounds).     Mr  Bell  can  only  teach  it  by  transfusing  it  into  living  organisms 
which  will  give  his  written  symbols  notion  and  meaning.     Would  the  best  book 
on   military  manoeuvres,  thrown  on  the  world,  make  men  mass  together  and 
march  and  countermarch  with  precision  and  certainty  ?    It  could  at  most  but 
incite  a  few  minds  to  drill  the  multitude.     But  how  inefficiently  would  they  do 
it,  in  comparison  with  those  who  had  themselves  been  drilled  and  directed  by  the 
man  who  conceived  the  manoeuvres !     It  is  the  same  in  the  practice  of  music, 
drawing,  sculpture,  or  any  mechanical  manipulation.     It  cannot  be  described, 
it  must  be  taught,  shown,  drilled  into  the  pupil,  to  whom  the  book  only  serves 
to  recall  the  master.     Hence,  if  the  world  will  enjoy  the   benefit,  the  great 
scientific  and  practical  benefit,  of  Mr  Melville  Bell's  discovery,  it  must  place  him 
in  a  position  to  communicate  it  to  proper  teachers,  by  whom  it  may  be  conveyed 
in  an  ever-widening  circle.     It  is  not  a  case  in  which  a  man  can  do  this  for 
himself,  without  ample,  independent  means  ;  and  even  then  ke^vould  have  little 
chance  of  success,  if  the  importance  of  his  mission  did  not  receive  a  public 
recognition.    For  this  reason,  Mr  Melville  Bell  appeals  to  the  Government  of  the 
country ;  and  his  appeal  should  be  backed  on  the  same  principle  which  induced 
France  to  give  Daguerre  a  pension  for  his  discovery.     The  benefit  is  one  for 


27 

mankind,  which  cannot  sufficiently  reward  the  individual ;  and  the  benefit  may 
therefore  be  lost  by  death,  if  not  secured  at  once. 

"  Allow  me  to  say  a  few  words  respecting  the  mechanical  arrangements  of  the 
alphabet.  When  I  first  turned  my  attention  to  inventing  letters,  I  learned  '  to 
work  at  case  and  press,'  that  I  might  know  what  would  or  what  would  not,  be 
practicable.  Mr  Melville  Bell  has  been,  perhaps,  too  anxious  to  reduce  the 
number  of  his  symbols.  He  requires  thirty-nine  distinct  types,  of  which  many, 
having  a  perfectly  square  face  (as  an  ?«),  can  be  used  in  four  positions 
(as  m  ui  §  § ),  giving  four  distinct  symbols.  This  renders  certain  typographical 
arrangements  necessary  that,  I  think,  would  be  best  avoided.  Such  a  defect,  if 
it  be  really  a  defect,  is,  however,  a  small  matter  of  detail,  which  is  easily 
arranged,  and  could  be  at  once  overcome  by  increasing  the  number  of  types.* 
They  would  even  then  not  be  too  numerous.  The  shapes  of  his  letters  are  not 
founded  on  those  of  any  existing  alphabet,  although  a  few  of  them  accidentally 
]/  recall  some  of  our  letters.  They  have  direct  reference  to  the  positions  of  the 
//organs  of  speech,  and  thus  can  be  read  at  sight  into  the  words  of  command 
which  the  organs  have  been  drilled  to  obey.  By  a  happy  contrivance,  the  vowels 
have  such  a  remarkably  different  appearance  from  the  consonants,  that  they 
strike  the  eye  at  once,  and  hence  determine  the  number  of  syllables  of  which 
the  word  consists.  Mr  Bell  considers  that  the  forms  of  the  letters  would  be  easy 
for  the  blind  to  recognise  by  touch  ;  but  of  this  I  am  no  judge.  Their  great 
/  peculiarity  is,  that  each  letter  has  its  genus  immediately  marked  upon  it,  by  its 
\general  contour,  and  its  species  by  the  detail  of  the  contour;  its  varieties  by 
diacritics  of  peculiar  kinds.  Thus  we  see  at  once  that  the  sounds  of  t>  d,  are  of 
the  same  genus,  and  that  the  sounds  of  /,  b,  are  also  of  one  genus.  Moreover, 
we  see  that  the  specific  distinction  between  f,  d,  is  the  same  as  the  specific  dis- 
tinction between  p,  b, — a  fact  quite  obscured  in  our  ordinary  letters,  although  also 
shown  thus  far  (and  somewhat  further,  but  by  no  means  consistently)  in  Mr  I. 
Pitman's  Phonography.  But  again,  to  t,  d>  are  related  s,  z,  and  also  Welsh  //> 
and  / ;  and  these  relations  are  again  shown  in  type,  the  specific  differences  being 

*  The  difficulty  alluded  toby  Mr  Ellis  has  been  obviated  in  the  typography  of  the  system  as  now  arranged. 
The  vowels  were  originally  written  with  lines  ascending  beyond  the  consonants,  and  the  spaces  over  the  square 
letters  were  filled  with  blank  types.  The  alphabet  as  shown  in  the  present  work  consists  of  '  capital'  letters  :  the 
'  lower-case'  alphabet  (with  ascending  and  descending  vowel-lines)  is  now  obtained,  without  blank  types,  by 
simply  casting  the  consonants  on  oblong  instead  of  square  bodies.  This  method  adds  12  types  to  the  numbe  • 
employed  in  the  '  capital'  alphabet.  Lithographic  illustrations  of  the  '  lower-case'  alphabet  will  be  found  at 
the  end  of  this  volume. 

D 


28 

the  same  as  before,  and  shown  in  the  same  way.  I  can  obviously  only  allude 
to  the  simplest  and  best  understood  relations,  but  this  may  be  sufficient  to  show 
the  principle.  The  specific  difference  between  these  pairs  is  the  presence  or 
absence  of  vocalized  breath  ;  and  the  specific  mark  of  difference  is  derived 
from  the  sign  for  '  the  natural  vowel/  which  is  again  derived  from  the  form 
of  the  glottis  necessary  for  vocalizing  breath  ;  and  thus  the  whole  system  is 
bound  together  by  a  philosophical  and  scientific  chain. 

"  How  the  work  of  the  missionary  and  philologist  would  be  facilitated  by 
the  use  of  such  an  alphabet — which  at  once  enables  them  to  exhibit  sounds  that 
no  existing  alphabet  can  even  vaguely  imitate,  and  to  show  their  relations  to 
one  another  at  a  glance,  and  thus  exhibit  the  relations  of  languages  now  forcibly 
concealed  by  differences  of  alphabetic  character,  or  by  different  usage  of  the 
same  alphabetic  character — I  need  scarcely  indicate.  Leaving  out  of  considera- 
tion, then,  what  may  be  naturally  considered  the  first  practical  and  scientific 
applications  of  such  a  mighty  instrument  as  lies  ready  to  be  used  when  we  call 
it  from  its  obscurity,  its  immediate  home  uses  would  be  of  great  educational 
value.  If  the  teachers  in  our  schools  were  drilled  in  the  use  of  such  an  alphabet, 
even  only  to  the  extent  of  European  sounds,  they  could  correct  all  mispronun- 
ciations ;  they  could  overcome,  to  a  great  extent,  all  natural  defects  of  utterance 
— as  stammering,  stuttering,  and  the  like  ;  and  they  could  prepare  their  pupils 
to  pronounce  foreign  languages  in  a  manner  that  would  not  so  seriously  offend 
the  native's  ear  as  our  present  "  Stratford  atte  Bowe  scole"  fashion.  Moreover, 
without  attempting  to  alter  the  established  orthography  of  any  country  (leaving 
that  to  the  wisdom  of  our  descendants,  which  it  would  be  hard  to  suppose  less 
than  that  of  our  ancestors,  who  did  change  their  orthography  and  alphabet),  a 
sufficient  number  of  books  in  Mr  Bell's  alphabet  (it  is  without  a  name, — why  not 
le  bel  alphabet?}  might  be  published,  being  reprints  of  classical  works  readily 
obtained  in  the  usual  alphabet,  to  render  the  acquisition  of  the  pronunciation  of 
our  own  or  any  Continental  tongue  easy  and  exact.  It  is  a  simple  statement  of 
fact  to  say  that  no  system  of  marking  our  pronunciation  which  has  hitherto  been 
adopted  (not  excepting  Walker's,  Smart's,  Worcester's,  or  the  phonetic  systems 
adopted  by  myself,  or  subsequently  in  America,  and  still  more  lately  in  the 
presumed  improvements  by  Mr  I.  Pitman)  has  succeeded  in  marking  the  extent 
of  national  peculiarities  of  English  speech,  to  the  accuracy  possible  in  Mr  Bell's 
system. 

"  I    am    afraid    my    language   may    seem    exaggerated,    and   yet    I    have 


29 

endeavoured  to  moderate  my  tone,  and  have  purposely  abstained  from  giving 
full  expression  to  the  high  satisfaction  and  pleasure  which  I  have  derived  from 
my  insight  into  the  theory  and  practice  of  Mr  Melville  Bell's  '  Visible  Speech/ 
as  it  is  rightly  named." 

The  following  Editorial  article  from  the  "Athenaeum"  of  July  I5th,  1865, 
was  also  founded  on  an  examination  of  the  Theory  of  the  System  : — 

"  Mr  Alexander  Melville  Bell,  who  has  for  many  years  attended  to  the 
removal  of  defects  in  pronunciation,  produces  a  method  of  writing  sounds :  this 
method  is  submitted  to  the  severest  tests  with  perfect  success.  It  consists  in 
picturing  by  totally  new  symbols  the  action  of  the  several  organs  of  speech,  tongue, 
lips,  teeth,  &c.  Each  one  of  the  symbols  is  a  direction  to  do  something  :  so  that  if 
the  user  of  it  had  forgotten  the  sound  it  represents,  he  would  be  taught  it  again 
by  merely  following  directions.  The  symbols,  of  course,  represent  the  most 
elementary  actions  of  the  organs  :  put  together,  they  produce  compounds.  A 
full  sneeze,  for  example,  is  a  complex  operation  :  it  comes  among  what  are 
called  inarticulate  sounds  ;  but  Mr  Bell  writes  it  down,  and,  for  aught  we  know, 
could  undertake  to  furnish  every  member  of  the  House  of  Commons  with  a 
symbol  representative  of  his  own  particular  sneeze,  as  distinguished  from  those 
of  all  his  colleagues. 

"  We,  and  many  others,  have  seen  this  method  tested  in  the  following  way. — 
Mr  Bell  sends  his  two  Sons  out  of  the  room,  and  then  invites  the  company  to 
make  words  in  any  language,  pronounced  rightly  or  wrongly,  and  sounds  of  any 
kind,  no  matter  how  absurd  or  original :  for  it  is  the  success  of  this  method  that 
whatever  the  organs  of  speech  can  do,  the  new  alphabet  can  record.  Mr  Bell 
tries  each  sound  himself,  until  the  proposer  admits  that  he  has  got  it :  he  then 
writes  it  down.  After  a  score  of  such  attempts  have  been  recorded,  the  young 
gentlemen  are  recalled,  and  they  forthwith  read  what  is  presented  to  them,  re- 
producing to  a  nicety,  amidst  general  laughter  and  astonishment,  all  the  queer 
Babelisms  which  a  grave  party  of  philologists  have  strained  their  muscles  to  in- 
vent. The  original  symbols,  when  read  sound  after  sound,  would  make  a  Chris- 
tian fancy  himself  in  the  Zoological  Gardens. 

"  The  utility  of  such  a  method  is  obvious  :  it  is  clearly  one  of  those  steps  of 
which  people  admit  the  utility  so  long  as  they  can  deny  the  practicability  ;  and 


30 

then,  when  obliged  to  admit  the  practicability,  they  deny  the  utility.  Mr  Bell 
has  formed  a  wide  opinion  of  the  range  of  application  of  his  invention.  He 
may,  or  may  not,  be  fully  justified  :  but  every  one  can  see  a  great  deal  of  what 
he  sees.  To  communicate  through  the  telegraph  by  pure  sounds,  independently 
of  meaning,  so  that  Arabic  or  Chinese  may  travel  from  a  clerk  who  knows  not 
a  word,  to  another  just  as  unlearned  as  himself :  to  teach  the  dumb  how  to  speak 
by  instructing  them  in  the  actual  use  of  their  organs :  to  take  down  the  sounds 
of  foreign  languages,  especially  those  of  savages,  and  to  transmit  them  home : 
to  learn  how  to  pronounce  a  foreign  language  by  interlinear  use  of  the  alphabet 
of  sounds  : — will  be  a  very  pretty  instalment.  And  while  this  is  being  gained 
the  rest  may  be  discussed. 

"  Mr  Bell  comes  forward  with  a  petition  to  the  Government.  He  asks  just  this 
— that  the  nation  will  be  at  the  expense  of  casting  his  types  and  circulating 
his  method  ;  also  that  he  may  be  enabled  to  give  to  a  sufficient  number  the  re- 
quisite oral  instruction.  He  submits  that  if  he  should  be  obliged  to  do  all  this 
for  himself,  his  system  will  be  freely  given  to  all  the  rest  of  the  world,  but  re- 
stricted within  the  British  empire,  by  the  action  of  the  law  of  copyright.  We 
sincerely  hope  that  he  will  be  taken  up,  either  by  the  Government  or  by  the  part 
of  the  public  especially  concerned.  To  us  it  seems  that  the  Missionary  Societies 
alone  would  find  it  worth  their  while  to  bear  the  whole  expense.  But  we  should 
best  like  to  see  the  Crown  forward  in  putting  before  the  world — after  still  further 
and  sharper  testing,  of  course — a  discovery  which,  if  it  be  what  we  cannot  doubt 
it  is,  must  be  called  the  final  victory  over  a  difficulty  as  old  as  written  language, 
and  an  obstacle  which  has  seemed  to  inhere  in  the  nature  of  writing  itself. 

"This  system  was  perfectly  completed  in  April  1864.  As  long  ago  as  1849, 
Mr  Bell  published  a  work  in  which  he  said,  '  It  would  really  be  a  matter  of  but 
little  difficulty  to  reconstruct  our  alphabet,  and  furnish  it  with  invariable  marks 
for  every  appreciable  variety  of  vocal  and  articulate  sound.'  But  when  he  came 
to  the  attempt,  he  found  some  lions  in  the  path,  which,  as  is  the  nature  of  that 
sort  of  lion,  did  not  show  themselves  until  the  huntsman  came  close  to  their 
dens.  The  monsters  were  successfully  attacked  :  but  they  took  a  long  time  to 
conquer.  That  they  are  conquered,  has  been  seen. 

"  All  that  has  hitherto  been  tried  is  the  attempt  to  put  the  letters  of  a  lan- 
guage or  languages  into  symbols.  We  remember  a  work  of  the  last  century 
which  professed  to  symbolize  accent,  rythm,  and  cadence.  A  great  many  efforts 
have  been  made  to  spell  words :  but  the  system  before  us  spells  spelling!' 


31 

If  the  Author  has  to  complain  of  the  insouciance  of  Government  Officials 
in  reference  to  his  proposition  for  a  free  promulgation  of  '  Visible  Speech/  he 
has  no  cause  for  any  other  feeling  than  that  of  the  highest  satisfaction  on 
account  of  the  interest  uniformly  shown  by  the  Press  ;  as  well  as  by  all  who 
have  witnessed  the  experiments  in  application  of  the  Invention.  Among  the 
latter,  he  desires  to  mention  the  name  of  Professor  S.  S.  Haldeman  (of  Columbia, 
Pennsylvania,  U.S.) — Author  of  the  Trevelyan  Prize  Essay  on  '  Analytic 
Orthography' — whose  warm  appreciation  deserves  this  special  acknowledgement. 

A  distinguished  Bohemian  Linguist,  CENEK  SERCL,*  who,  while  still  a 
young  man,  has  rivalled,  if  not  surpassed,  the  renowned  achievements  of  Cardinal 
Mezzofanti,  has  favoured  the  Author  with  the  following  letter,  which  he  has 
much  pleasure  in  presenting  here  : 

"  37  Museum  Street,  6th  September  1866. 

"  At  the  request  of  Mr  Bell,  I  dictated  to  him  many  of  the  most  difficult 
words  of  the  Bohemian  language,  which  were  afterwards  read  by  his  Son,  who 
having  been  absent  at  the  time  of  dictation,  did  not  hear  me  pronounce  them, 
but  nevertheless  pronounced  them  in  a  very  satisfactory  manner,  and  extremely 
intelligibly.  I  also  selected  the  most  difficult  words  in  almost  all  European,  and 
five  Asiatic  languages,  which  were  then  written  down  by  Mr  Bell  according  to 
his  system  ;  his  Son  having  been  again  called  in,  read  them  most  correctly, 
pronounced  every  syllable  very  distinctly,  and  put  the  right  accent  on  every 
word.  Though  I  am  not  acquainted  with  the  particulars  of  this  truly  remark- 
able system,  yet  I  dare  say,  that  as  far  as  I  know,  there  does  not  exist  any 
system,  nor  did,  which  would  express  the  most  different  peculiarities  of 
human  speech  and  mode  of  utterance,  in  a  manner  so  satisfactory  as  Mr  Bell's 
system  really  does.  I  am  therefore  happy  to  state,  that  in  my  opinion  this 
system,  as  being  perfectly  original,  and,  as  far  as  outward  appearance  goes,  most 
simple  indeed,  is  of  the  highest  practical  value ;  the  more  so  at  a  time  when  the 
idea  of  a  general  alphabet  is  becoming  a  question  of  the  highest  importance. 

"  CENEK  SERCL." 

(*  Pronounced 


TABULAR     EXPOSITION 


VISIBLE     SPEECH, 


35 


3 
4* 

5* 
6* 
7* 
8* 


* 


10 

11* 
12* 

13 
14 
15 
1  6 
17 
1  8 
19 
20 
21 


23 

24 

25 
26 


27 

28 


COMPLETE  TABLE  OF  RADICAL  SYMBOLS. 
The  fundamental  principle  of  Visible  Speech  is,  that  all  Relations  of 
Sound  are  symbolized  by  Relations  of  Form.  Each  organ  and  each  mode  of 
organic  action  concerned  in  the  production  or  modification  of  sound,  has  its 
appropriate  Symbol  ;  and  all  Sounds  of  the  same  nature  produced  at  different 
parts  of  the  mouth,  are  represented  by  a  Single  Symbol  turned  in  a  direction 
corresponding  to  the  organic  position. 

The  following  are  all  the  Radical  Symbols  : — 
i        O     The  Throat  open.     [Aspirate.] 
2*      0  "        contracted.    [Whisper.] 

X  "        closed.     [Glottal  Catch.] 

I  sounding.    [Voice.]  1   The   Stems   of  all 

J         "  "          and  the  lips  '  rounded.'  j        Vowels. 

C     Part  of  the  Mouth  contracted. "i  ^ 

vThe  Stems  of  all  Consonants. 
C  "       divided.       / 

(      The  Nasal  Valve  open.    [Soft  Palate.] 

Vowel  Definer.  ) 

.... ,  Hoined  to  4  and  5. 

0  Wide  Vowel  Definer.  ) 

Shutter.    Joined  to  6. 

£  Mixer.    Joined  to  6  and  7. 

{  Consonant  Definer. 

Y  Force  Director. 

>  Breath  Director, 

c  Tongue  Director. 
Stopper. 

H  Divider. 

$  Vibrator. 

}  Holder,  or  Long. 

<  Abrupt. 

1  Hiatus. 
o  Link. 

'       Accent. 


1 


Modulators. 


*  Of  these  Symbols  the  Ten  marked  *  make  up  all  the  Vowel  and  Consonant  Letters,  as  shown  in  the 
next  Table. 


THE   TEN    RADICAL    SYMBOLS, 

FROM  WHICH  ALL  VOWEL  AND  CONSONANT  LETTERS  ARE  FORMED. 
i.      2.       3.     4.      5.      6.      7.       8.      9.    10. 


I       I 


0   I  C     C 


Letters. 


EXAMPLES   OF   LETTER-COMBINATIONS. 
Letters. 


\  3  &c.,  combining  I  and  3. 

1  3  &c.,  " 

\  3-  &C.,  " 

1  J  &C., 

OS 


C  I 


4- 

3. 
4. 

i. 
10. 
6. 

6. 

8. 


€£     combining  6,  8,  and  i. 

O  "6  and  9. 
G  6,  9,  and  i. 

Q  6,  9,  and  10. 

61  6,  9,  10,  and  i. 

Q  "7  and  i. 
C  7  and  8. 

8  "          7,  8,  and  i. 


Consonants. 


COMPLETE  ALPHABET  OF  TYPES. 

CAPITALS. 
16  in  number.  Vowels.  —  20  in  number. 


I O 10 1 ClGICICiaiQl 

i  x  i  e  I  eieueiBlGiei 


n  in  1 13 1  nnii  r  1 3  u  i 
mm  i  H  mi  1 1  f  i  m  i 


'  LOWER  CASE'  LETTERS  (not  employed  in  this  Work.) 


Consonants, 
(28  in  number.) 

[Narrower  and  smaller  letters  of  the 
same  shapes  as  the  Capitals.] 

GLIDES, 
(7  in  number.) 


Vowels, 

(20  in  number.) 

[Letters  of  the  same  shapes  as  the 
Capitals,  but  ascending  or  de- 
cending  beyond  the  Consonants.] 

MODIFIERS. 
(14  in  number.) 


imsmmm      n  if  i  \\  n  A  i  •  i  n  c  i  >  i  *>  i  »  i 


TONES.  —  (4  in  number.) 


All  the  Types  are  reversible,  to  show  kindred  sounds  of  different  organic  formation. 
The  Letters  are  to  be  learned  by  their  names  independently  of  sounds. 
The  names  of  the  Letters  describe  the  organic  positions  which  produce  the  sounds. 
The  following  Table  shows  the  name  of  each  letter  :— 


37 


COMPLETE   TABLE   OF   LETTERS— WITH    THEIR   NAMES. 


Consonants. 

v  owels. 

Aspirate, 

o    .                       -a             -d 

•£   0)               r^                     Q>               ^   0} 

*|         S          ~         x-~           -g          1 
t*  ^        i^          »£H        ;i  •£«           rt           «j 

o"^      S        Q       3e        S        r< 

High, 

A! 

o 

|l       1 

MS*           S 

73  «        *"        *•  » 

ll      §      eg 

1<?                   fe                   pE(  ^- 

O 

1 

1 

r 

T       I       I 

Throat, 

0 

X 

.  Mid, 

3 

3 

i 

\       C       C 

Throat  Voice, 

e 

j 

Low, 

J 

J 

i 

I       I      I 

Back, 

c 

C 

C 

C 

a 

Q           High  Round, 

1 

1 

i 

I       £      f 

Back  Voice, 

c 

£ 

8 

e 

a 

G          Mid  Round, 

} 

} 

* 

I      I      £ 

Front, 
Front  Voice, 
Point, 

o 
o 
o 

Q 

CO 
CO 

CO 

i 

Q 

a 

a 

Q          Low  Round, 
CD 
O 

J 

J  ! 

i 

I       t      t 

Glides. 

Point  Voice, 
Lip, 
Lip  Voice, 

Q 
0 
3 

D 

00 
3 
3 

02 

Q 
D 
O 

D 

B          | 

*••                      .                 r-i                 +£ 

15      8      1      §     * 
2      o      §      ft      § 

M        >•        rt        H       M 

1        a 
8      '3      .£• 

Round. 

•^'        c       "S 
a        S        'o        .& 
(£,         fn         PH         >-) 

<|I    115 

u 

ulu 

1     1     I     1     U           J 

i    1    n    |   T       4    | 

Modifiers  and 

Tones. 

i 

Nasal. 

7 

Trilled. 

0 

Suction  Stoppe 

d.       c   Abrupt. 

Level  Tone. 

:  

Nasal  Mixed. 

i 

Divided. 

1 

Emission  Stopp 

ed.    »    Hiatus. 

R.ising  Tone. 

J_ 

Inner. 

c 

Inverted. 

[To  Back.] 

0 

Link. 

<=>  Whistle. 

\ 

"ailing  Tone. 

\ 

Outer. 

0 

Protruded. 

[To  Lip.] 

Accent. 

<o>  Voiced  Whistle. 

V 

Compound  Rise. 

A 

Close. 

Stopped. 

Emphasis. 

r    High 

Key. 

A 

Compound  Fall. 

! 

Open. 

^ 

Suction. 



Holder. 

j    Low 

Key. 

— 

ORDER  OF  NOMENCLATURE. 

CONSONANTS  : — Organ,  first ;  'Voice'  last.  Thus  :  Back  C  ;  Back-mixed,  voice  (£  ;  Front- 
divided,  voice  00  ;  Front-mixcd-divided,  voice  QQ  ;  Point-shut  Q  ;  Lip-shut,  voice  |3  ; 
Point-nasal  O  !  &c- 

VOWELS  :— Elevation,  first ;  '  Round'  last.  Thus  :  High-back  1  ;  Mid-back,  wide  ]  ;  Low- 
mixed  X  ;  High-front,  Round  f  ;  Mid-mixed-wide,  Round  \  ;  &c. 

GLIDES: — 'Glide'  last.     Thus:  Brcath-glido  ;  Voice-glide,  I;  Lip  Round-glide  £;  &c. 


38 


DIAGRAMS   SHOWING   THE    RELATION    OF   THE   PRIMARY 
ORGANIC    SYMBOLS   TO   THE    ORGANS. 

CONSONANTS. 


X    Glottis  closed,  (catch.) 
I          "       narrow,  (voice.) 
O        "       open,  (aspirate.) 
0    Super- Glottal    Passage 

contracted,  (whisper.) 
J    Soft    Palate   depressed, 

(nasal.) 

C  Back  of  Tongue,  (con- 
tracting oral  passage.) 
O  Front  of  do.     (     do.     ) 
O  Point  of  do.     (     do.     ) 
O   Lips,  (     do.     ) 


VOWELS. 


}   Back  of  Tongue  high. 
I  Back  and  Front  do.  do. 
f  Front  do.  do. 

[The  dotted  lines  show  the  'high, 
'mid,'  and  'low'  positions  of  the 
tongue,  as  subsequently  explained.] 


39 


EXPLANATORY   TABLE   OF   SYMBOLS    FOR    CONSONANTS 
AND   GLIDES. 

Modifying. 

Consonants. 

Breath. 

Voice. 

I. 

0 

0 

Throat-passage  contracted. 

2. 

c 

G 

Back  of  tongue  contracting  mouth-passage. 

3- 

c 

8 

dividing                   " 

4- 

a 

€1 

closing                     " 

5- 

a 

G 

"                                                           with  nasal  emission. 

6. 

o 

0 

Front  of  tongue  contracting             " 

7- 

CO 

00 

dividing                   " 

8. 

Q 

CD 

"                closing                     " 

9- 

0 

CD 

with  nasal  emission. 

10. 

O 

Q 

Point  of-  tongue  contracting             " 

ii. 

Q 

00 

dividing 

12. 

a 

Q 

closing 

13- 

o 

05 

"                                                         with  nasal  emission. 

14. 

o 

3 

Lips  contracting  mouth-passage. 

IS- 

3 

3 

"     dividing 

1  6. 

D 

Q 

"     closing                     " 

17- 

O 

B 

with  nasal  emission. 

1  8. 

a 

B 

Back  position  (C)  modified  by  partial  effect  of  O 

19. 

Q 

03 

Front       "        (O)                                                      O 

20. 

^5 

Si5 

Point        "        (Q)                                    "                 O 

21. 

D 

3 

Lip                    (0)                                                      C 

22. 

C 

B 

Divided  emission  with  the  organs  in  the  position  (^ 

23- 

& 

9Q 

a                      ti                       a                     ^ 

24. 

u 

as 

^5 

25- 

3 

8 

D 

Glides,  or  Transitional  Semi-  Vowels. 

I. 

5 

Partial 

effect  of  0  with  vowel  quality  predominating. 

2. 

I 

(i 

G 

3- 

? 

tj 

e 

4- 

K 

i( 

o 

5- 

ft 

a 

O°  0 

6. 

y 

(i 

o 

7- 

¥ 

" 

G°O 

8. 

1 

u 

3 

9- 


Modifiers. 


\   Inner  position. ^Applicable  to  any 
\   Outer  j  of  the  Consonants. 


c   Inverted.    ^Applicable  to  Point 
o  Protruded,  j        Consonants. 


40 

EXPLANATORY   TABLE    OF   SYMBOLS    FOR   VOWEL 
CONFIGURATIONS. 

Explanation. 


Primary.  Wide.  (1) 

I.       1       1       Back  of  tongue(2)  high  and  retracted. 
2.       ]        3                    "                   retracted  at  a  middle  elevation. 

3- 

I 

J 

"                   low  and  retracted. 

4- 

T 

T 

Back 

and  front  (3)  of  tongue  high. 

5- 

I 

I 

"                   at  a  middle  elevation. 

6. 

I 

I 

low. 

7- 

I 

I 

Front 

of  tongue(4)  high  and  advanced. 

8. 

C 

C 

advanced  at  a  middle  elevation. 

9- 

I 

I 

low  and  advanced. 

10. 

1 

1 

No.  i, 

rounded,  (lip  aperture  narrow.) 

u. 

} 

J 

"      2, 

(         "            mid.      ) 

12. 

J 

J 

11    3. 

(                      broad.   ) 

13- 

! 

I 

"    4, 

"          (         "            narrow.) 

14. 

* 

I 

"    5, 

(                      mid.      ) 

IS- 

I 

1 

"    6, 

(         "            broad.  ) 

1  6. 

£ 

f 

"    7, 

"          (         "            narrow.) 

17- 

{ 

{ 

"    8, 

(                      mid.      ) 

1  8. 

f 

1 

"    9, 

(         "            broad.  ) 

MODIFIERS. 
Applicable  to  all  Vowels 


Nasalized. 


"       and  gutturalized. 


\     Long. 


Abrupt. 

Stopped  in  the  throat. 

Accented. 


(1.)  The  'Primary'  and  the  'Wide*  Vowels  have  the  same  oral  configurations;  but  for  the  'Wide' 
sounds,  the  voice  channel  from  the  throat  to  the  configurative  aperture  is  expanded. 

(2.)  For  '  Back '  Vowels,  the  back  of  the  tongue  forms  a  narrow  aperture  with  the  soft  palate,  or  (for  the 
'  low-back ')  with  the  pharynx. 

(3.)  For  '  Mixed '  Vowels,  the  back  and  the  front  of  the  tongue  both  modify  the  voice-channel :  the  back 
of  the  tongue  does  not  descend  below  its  '  mid '  position  for  the  lowest  of  the  '  Mixed  '  series. 

(4.)  For  '  Front'  Vowels,  the  front  of  the  tongue  forms  a  narrow  aperture  between  it  and  the  roof  of  the 
mouth — a  free  passage  being  left  between  the  back  of  the  tongue  and  the  soft  palate.  From  the  '  low-back '  to  the 
'  high-front'  position,  theconfigurative  aperture  progressively  advances,  by  the  nine  stages  J  1  1  X  1  T  I  Cf> 
as  illustrated  in  a  subsequent  Diagram. 


41 

TABLE   SHOWING   THE  MUTUAL   RELATIONS    OF   SYMBOLS 

AND    SOUNDS, 
By  which,  a  few  Sounds  being  known,  other  Sounds  may  be  deduced  from  their  Symbols. 

CONSONANTS  AND  GLIDES. 

As  Q  is  to  O  so  are  G  to  Q,  Q  to  O,  &  to  £3,  3  to  Q,  (£  to  Q>  &c- 
"     S5      "      Q       "        G    "   G,  CD    "    CD,  and  0  to   O- 

"  Q  "  Q  "  G  "  G,  0  "  O,  G  to  3,  &c. 

"  00  "  Q  "  8  "  G,  CO  "  CD,  3   "  G,  &c. 

"  00  "  0  "  8  "  6,  00  "  O,  3  "  3,  e*S  to  y,  &  to  Q,  &c. 

"  5i5  "  Q  "  03  "  00,  to  "  O,  £13  "  CO,  &c. 

11  O  "  IS  3  "    2,  C  "  T,  0   "  y,  0  to  5,  &c. 

VOWELS. 
As  £  is  to  £  so  are  t  to  t,  3  to  ],  1  to  },  J  to  J,  &c. 

"  I  "  I  "  1  "  I-  I  "  L  1  "  J,         J  "  J,  &c. 

<(  1  (<  I  "  3  "  C,  J  "  L  J  "  t,  &c. 

"  J  "  3  f  "  I,  J  "  J,  I  "  C,  &c. 

"  I  "  II  "  I  "  3C,  I  "  JL  T  "  II,  &c. 

The  relations  of  the  Vowels  are  fully  exhibited  in  the  following  arrangement.* 
A  B  C  D 

114T7I  Il4«r7r  14-4T7f  1  i.    4  T    7  p 

3T6T9T  3  T     6  T     9  T  3J6T9J  3T6T9T 

JJLL  JJLl  j       ±      t  J      ±       t 

As  Class  B  is  to  Class  A,  so  is  Class  D  to  Class  C. 
C          "          A,          "          D        "        B. 

As  are  the  Numbers,  so  are  the  Sounds  in  each  Class,     Thus  : 

Vertical  Relation.  Horizontal  Relation. 

2  is  intermediate  to  I  and  3,  4  is  intermediate  to   I  and  7. 

5  "  4     "  6.  5  "  2     "  8. 

8  "  7     «  9.  6  •«  3     «  9. 

Diagonal  Relation. 

5  is  intermediate  to  I  and  9. 

5 ^ 3     "     7- 

*  The  practical  application  of  these  Relations  in  learning  foreign  sounds  is  shown  in  a  subsequent  section. 


THEORETICAL  EXPLANATIONS, 
EXERCISES,    &C. 


THEORETICAL   EXPLANATIONS   AND    EXERCISES. 

The  preceding  Tables  and  Diagrams  are  intended  to  convey  a  general 
knowledge  of  the  principle  of  '  Visible  Speech,'  for  the  benefit  of  cursory 
Readers. 

In  explaining  the  Symbols  in  detail,  we  take  first  those  which  represent  the 
elements  of  Interjectional  or  Inarticulate  utterance. 


Symbols.  Names. 

1.  O      Aspirate. 

2.  I       Voice. 

3.  0       Throat. 

4.  0       Throat-Voice. 


RUDIMENTAL   SYMBOLS. 

Explanation. 

Emission  of  breath  with  the  throat  wide  (H.) 
The  glottis  narrow  and  sounding.  (Vowel.) 
Emission  of  breath  with   the   throat   contracted, 

(whisper.) 
Emission   of    voice   with   the    throat    contracted, 

(hoarse  murmur.) 

5.  X       Catch.  The  glottis  closed  [and  opened,]  (a  cough.) 

6.  |       Nasal.  The  nasal  valve  open. 

7.  J       Nasal-Mixed.         The  nasal  valve  open  and  the  throat  contracted. 

8.  \       Trill.  Vibration  of  the  organ  symbolized. 

9.  A       Close.  Organic  closeness  or  upward  pressure,  causing  per- 

cussive emission. 

Organic  openness  with  softness  of  emission. 
Inward  action  of  the  air. 
Transitional  emission  of  breath  from  the  symbolized 

configuration. 

13.  '        Stop.  A  stop  in  the  symbolized  configuration,  with  cessa- 

tion of  the  impulse  of  utterance.  (An  unfinished 
element.) 

14.  >        Hiatus.  The  preceding  element  finished    independently  of 

the  following. 

Shorter  than  ordinary  '  short  quantity.' 
The  symbolized  configuration  '  held,'  with  the  im- 
pulse of  utterance  continued.  (Long  'quantity.') 
17.       '        Accent.  Impulse  on  the  succeeding  element  or  syllable. 


10.  Y       Open. 

11.  <       Suction. 

12.  >       Breath-Glide. 


15.'      <        Abrupt. 

1 6.        }        Long  or 'Holder.' 


The  numbers  attached  to  the  Symbols  are  merely  for  convenience  of 
reference  to  the  subsequent  explanatory  paragraphs.  The  natural  order  of  the 
Symbols  is  shown  in  the  Alphabetic  Tables,  page  37. 


46 


THE    ORGANIC    RELATIONS    OF    THE    RUDIMENTAL 

SYMBOLS. 

The  brief  explanations  of  the  Symbols  given  in  the  preceding  Table  are 
supplemented  by  the  following  more  complete  descriptions,  which  explain  the 
rationale  of  the  symbolization.  The  latter  should  be  thoroughly  understood  by 
those  who  study  the  Science  of  Universal  Alphabetics  for  the  purpose  of 
teaching,  or  with  the  view  of  symbolizing  languages  at  hearing. 

Symbols. 

1.  O         When  the  glottis  and  the  super-glottal  passage  are  perfectly  open, 

the  breath  creates  no  sound  in  its  emission.  A  moderate  degree  of 
expulsiveness  to  render  the  '  aspiration '  audible  is  implied  in  Q-  The 
symbol  is  pictorial  of  the  expanded  breath-channel  in  the  throat. 

2.  I          When  the   glottis  is  contracted  to  a  narrow  chink,  the  breath  in 

passing  sets  the  edges  of  the  orifice — the  'vocal  ligaments' — in  vibra- 
tion, and  creates  sonorous  'voice.'  This  vocalizing  condition  of  the 
glottis  is  pictured  in  the  Symbol. 

3.  0          When  the  glottis  is  open  and  the  super-glottal  passage  is  contracted, 

the  breath  creates  in  the  latter  the  non-sonorous  rustling  or  friction 
which  is  called  'whisper.'  The  relative  expansion  of  the  throat- 
channel  for  O  and  0  is  pictured  in  the  Symbols. 

The  organic  effect  of  0  will  be  understood  by  whispering  a  '  voiced- 
consonant,'  such  as  V.  The  result  is  clearly  different  from  the  sound 
of  the  non-vocal  consonant  of  corresponding  oral  formation  (F.)  For 
the  former,  the  fricativeness  of  the  breath  is  audible  from  the  throat, 
through  the  oral  configuration  ;  for  the  latter,  the  breath-friction  is 
audible  only  from  the  lip. 

4.  0          The  symbol  0  is  a  compound  of  0  and  I,  and  denotes  whisper  and 

voice  heard  simultaneously  ; — a  vocal  murmur  modified  by  breath- 
friction  in  the  super-glottal  passage. 

5.  X          Symbol  X  pictures  the  conjoined  edges  of  the  glottis,  and  denotes 

the  '  catch '  of  the  breath  which  is  heard  (with  violence  of  percussion) 
in  a  cough.  The  linguistic  effect  of  X  is  softer,  but  distinctly  percus- 
sive, when  an  aspiration  or  a  vocal  sound  follows  the  '  catch.' 


47 

Symbols. 

6.  J          The  passage  of  the  nostrils  is  governed  by  the  soft  palate,  which 

acts  the  part  of  a  valve.  When  there  is  no  nasal  emission,  the  upper 
surface  of  the  soft  palate  presses  against  the  inner  end  of  the  nostrils. 
See  Diagram,  page  13.  Symbol  (, — which  is  pictorial  of  the  pendu- 
lous palate  or  its  narrow  prolongation,  the  uvula, — denotes  that  the 
soft  palate  is  depressed,  so  that  the  breath  passes  into  the  nostrils  as 
well  as  into  the  mouth. 

7.  f          Symbol  f  is  a  compound  of  J  and  0,  and  denotes  guttural  contrac- 

tion with  nasality,  as  heard  in  the  French  sounds  in,  on,  &c.  In  these 
elements  there  is  a  gliding  semi-consonant  effect  in  the  throat  as  well 
as  nasal  modification. 

8.  \          Symbol  \  denotes  a  loose  vibration  or  quiver  of  the  organ  to  which 

the  symbol  applies.  Thus  the  tongue  vibrates  against  the  front  of 
the  palate  in  forming  the  Scotch  or  Spanish  R  ;  the  uvula  vibrates 
against  the  back  of  the  tongue  in  producing  the  French  R  '  grasseye,' 
or  the  Northumbrian  '  burr ;'  the  lateral  edges  of  the  tongue  vibrate 
in  forming  a  close  variety  of  L  ;  the  lips  vibrate  when  they  are 
relaxed  and  closely  approximated  ;  and  in  the  same  way  the  edges  of 
the  throat-passage  vibrate,  with  a  'growling'  effect,  when  the  current 
of  breath  is  intercepted  by  sufficiently  close  but  loose  approximation. 
Symbol  \  thus  refers  to  the  element  after  which  it  is  written  ;  as  : 

O  \  a  flutter  of  the  breath. 
I  \    a  quiver  of  the  voice. 
0  \    throat  vibration  : — a  'gruff'  whisper. 
0  \    hoarse  vibratory  murmur  : — '  growling.' 

9.  A          Symbols  \  and  Y,  by  themselves,  refer  to  the  aperture  of  the  mouth 
10.      V      as  affected  by  the  close  (A)  or  open  (V)  position  of  the  jaws.    Following 

other  Symbols,  \  denotes  configurative  compression,  with  consequent 
percussion  on  leaving  the  configuration  ;  and  Y  denotes  configurative 
openness  or  organic  laxity.  Thus  : 

OA  An  exhaustive  aspiration  from  upward  pressure  of  the  dia- 
phragm ; — a  wheeze. 


48 

Symbols. 

OY  ^  gentle  inaudible  aspiration. 

XA    Glottal  closure  with  distension  of  the  larynx  from  pressure  on 

the  confined  breath,  and  percussive  emission  on  opening 

the  passage  ; — a  cough. 

n.      <          Whisper  or  voice  may  be  produced  by  air  going  inwards  (<)  or  by 

12.  >      breath  coming  out  (>).     All  symbols  except  <  and  •  imply  emission. 

Symbol  >  is  used  to  denote  a  transitional  emission  from  the  symbolized 
configuration  in  passing  from  one  position  to  another.  The  effect  is 
different  from  the  throat-aspiration,  Q-  Thus,  from  the  '  shut'  position 
of  the  glottis  (X)  we  may  either  open  sharply  upon  an  utterance  of 
voice  (XI)  or  we  may  ease  off  tlie pressure  of  the  '  catch'  by  interpola- 
ting a  'breath-glide'  Q>I). 

13.  '  Symbol  •  signifies  that  the  organic  separation  or  recoil  from  any 

symbolized  position — which  is  always  implied  in  final  elements  when 
the  '  stop '  is  not  written — does  not  take  place.  Thus  X-  is  an 
unfinished  '  catch,'  in  forming  which  the  impulse  ceases  with  the 
closure  of  the  glottis. 

The  effect  of  organic  '  stop '  is  implied  between  elements  in 
verbal  combinations,  such  as  tl  in  outlaw,  td  in  outdo,  &c.  ;  where, 
necessarily,  the  t  is  not  finished  by  organic  recoil,  as  it  would  be  at 
the  end  of  a  word.  In  these  cases,  of  course,  the  '  stop '  does  not 
require  to  be  written. 

The  interruption  of  the  throat-passage  represented  by  X-  is  one  of 
the  principal  sources  of  difficulty  in  stammering. 

14.  >  In  verbal  combinations  of  elementary  sound,  each  element  is  insep- 

arably joined  to  the  succeeding  one.  When  any  element,  except  the 
last  in  a  combination,  is  finished  independently  of  what  follows,  the 
sign  of  'hiatus'  (>)  is  used.  Thus  in  analysing  or  phonetically 
'spelling'  a  syllable,  we  should  say  that  QI  consists  of  the  elements 
O'l — interposing  a  break.  The  effect  of  >  will  be  understood  by 
pronouncing  the  word  '  bedtime,'  in  which  the  d  and  t  are  not  dis- 
joined, in  contrast  with  the  separate  pronunciation  of  the  two  words 
'  bed,  time'  Symbol  >  is  an  aspirated  hiatus ;  Symbol  >  is  non- 
aspirated — a  mere  interval. 


49 

Symbols. 

15.  <          Symbol  <  denotes  a  very  'abrupt'  utterance,  shorter  than  ordinary 

'  short  quantity.'  The  latter  is  implied  in  all  symbols  where  no  sign 
of  quantity  is  written. 

1 6.  }          The  sign  of  '  long  quantity'  or  'holder,'  is  of  obvious  application  to 

sounds ;  but  it  applies  also  to  organic  configurations  which  yield  no 
sound,  as  to  X|>  where  it  denotes  an  interval  of  silence,  from  the  con- 
tinued closure  of  the  glottis.  The  Symbol  \  shows  that  the  preceding 
configuration,  of  whatever  nature,  is  simply  '  held '  for  a  moment. 
Extra  prolongation  may  be  denoted  by  { }, 

17.  '  The  sign  of  'accent'  or  stress  distinguishes  the  syllable  in  a  word, 

or  the  element  in  a  combination,  which  receives  the  principal  impulse. 
The  mark  is  placed  on  the  left  side,  or  before  the  accented  syllable. 

The  learner  may  usefully  familiarize  himself  with  the  preceding  rudimental 
Symbols,  by  pronouncing  them  in  expressive  combinations,  before  proceeding  to 
the  more  definite  elements  of  Articulate  Speech. 

When  the  breath,  or  the  voice,  is  moulded  by  precise  dispositions  of  the 
parts  of  the  mouth,  '  Vowels '  and  '  Consonants '  are  formed  ;  but  at  present 
let  the  Reader  conceive  only  of  a  simple  '  aspiration,'  and  a  simple  utterance 
of  '  voice,'  unaffected  by  any  definite  arrangement  of  the  mouth,  as  represented 
by  the  Symbols  Q  and  I- 

The  Alphabetic  Writing  of  such  effects  as  those  in  the  following  Illustra- 
tions is  at  least  a  novelty,  and  it  will  no  doubt  be  a  sufficiently  amusing  one. 
But  there  is  also  a  practical  utility  involved  in  the  mastery  of  these  rudimentary 
processes  ;  namely,  in  preparing  the  learner  for  the  more  important  applications 
that  follow,  and  in  giving  him  some  command  over  the  organs  of  utterance. 
Such  exercises  will  effectually  obviate  the  difficulty  in  apprehending  pure  sound's 
irrespectively  of  letters  and  verbal  associations,  which  generally  perplexes 
beginners  in  their  first  attempts  at  speech-analysis. 

The  Reader  may  probably  observe  that  many  of  the  following  combinations 
might  communicate  other  sentiments,  &c.,  when  pronounced  with  different 
Tones  or  vocal  Inflexions.  But  in  the  meantime,  this  prime  element  of  Inar- 
ticulate Expressiveness  is  left  out  of  consideration.  In  a  subsequent  section 
the  effect  of  the  Inflexions  of  the  Voice  is  separately  treated  of. 


50 


EXERCISES  ON  THE  RUDIMENTAL  SYMBOLS, 

FORMING     INTERACTIONAL     OR     INARTICULATE     UTTERANCES. 


OY<  OYl 

silent  respiration. 

Oi<J( 

0\<  OI 

sighing       " 

'00  0 

O<  O 

panting      " 

OY<C 

OH<  OH 

fluttering  " 

Ol<5( 

0(1<  0(1 

semi-nasal" 

0<X- 

01<XO 

uneasy       " 

OX- 

OI<X>OI 

painful       " 

01 

O<XOH 

groaning    " 

OH 

OI<OI 

guttural     " 

0< 

0(KO(I 

naso-guttural 

OOH< 

01HOW 

stertorous  " 

X0<  01 

Voiceless. 

OOI     a  sigh, 
a  sneer. 

3  a  yawn.       XOI 
OX*  a  sneeze  checkd.  XAO 


X'X'X'  suppressed 
chuckling, 
relief, 
a  short  cough, 

a  hiccough.  XAOX1    a  cough  checked- 

an  effort,       XAO  I  a  wheezing  cough. 

nausea.       XAOX"  XAOX-  XA>acough, 

disgust.         X'0$     a  hem. 

a  gasp.          X?  \       a  grunt. 

shuddering.  X? H     growling. 

sobbing.        XAO  H  clearing  the  throat. 


Vocal 

I      a  murmur  of  observation.  I<  a  pang. 

I(     a  drowsy  murmur.  I|  a  moan. 

I?  a  murmur  of  disapprobation.  I<  a  start. 

1$  "          sympathy.          IXA'IfS    a  loud  hem. 

IA  suffering.  I'XAIO  1 1  a  cough. 

IO  Belief.  I(|  I(<  I(|  I(< braying. 

IX  threatening.        If|| 

']>I  regret.  OI 

surprise. 

disgust. 

weariness. 


m 

'IOII     " 

lO'II      "         triumph. 
IX A-      a  violent  effort. 
IX1 1 1    a  baby's  scolding. 


Oil  " 
'OIOI  " 
OI'OI  " 


OI? 
OIX' 


lowing. 

a   murmur    of 
disappointment. 
"     ridicule. 
vexation. 
decision. 
weariness. 
annoyance. 
discovery. 


OI'XHI     ahem, 


XI  t 
XYII 
XI  H 


a  pang. 

acute  pain. 
apprehension  of 
pain. 

a  grumble. 

a  growl. 

a  soft  hem, 

a  sudden  start 

a  cough. 
XA'IO  I  la  wheezing  cough. 
X0$  |      clearing  the  voice. 
XI?  $  I   clearing  the  throat 

and  nose. 


XI  ( 
XI?  * 
X  >  I 

XI< 
XAI'OI 


51 
CONSONANTS. 

A  Consonant  is  an  action  of  some  part  of  the  throat  or  the  mouth,  yielding 
an  effect  of  friction  or  percussion  from  the  squeezing,  dividing,  or  stopping  of 
the  breath.  All  Consonants  may  be  considered  as  consisting  of  two  parts  : 
I.  a  configurative  position  of  the  organs  ;  and,  II.  an  action  of  recoil,  or  of 
transition  to  the  position  for  a  succeeding  element.  These  are,  however, 
inseparable  parts  of  ordinary  Consonants.  When  the  configuration  is  more  than 
merely  transitional,  and  is  '  held '  for  a  perceptible  time,  the  effect  is  separately 
indicated. 

All  the  Consonant  Symbols  are  derived  from  the  'stem'  C,  which, 
according  to  the  direction  in  which  the  curve  is  turned,  represents  the  Back,  the 
Front,  or  the  Point  of  the  Tongue,  or  the  Lips.  In  each  case  the  Symbol 
denotes  the  same  kind  of  fricative  or  sibilant  emission  of  breath  through  a 
centre-aperture  formed  between  the  closely  approximated  organs. 

The  outline  of  the  Organic  Curve  is  indented  or  'divided'  (Q)  to  show 
emission  by  side-apertures, — of  course  with  centre-stoppage  ; — and  the  points  of 
the  Primary  Curve  are  suggestively  closed  by  a  straight  line  (Q)  to  denote  com- 
plete stoppage  of  the  breath  by  the  organic  configuration.  The  sign  of  nasality 
(()  joined  to  the  Shut-Consonant  symbol  (Q)  shows  oral  stoppage  with  nasal 
emission.  The  Organic  Curves  of  opposite  formation  are  united  in  the  symbols 
Q  Q,  &c.  (  =  C°O>  O°O,  &c.)  to  show  the  simultaneous  action  of  the  two 
parts  of  the  mouth  denoted  by  the  component  Curves. 

The  symbol  of  Voice  (I)  is  incorporated  with  each  of  the  '  Primary,' 
'  Divided,'  '  Shut,'  or  '  Nasal '  Letters,  to  denote  the  addition  of  vocal  murmur 
to  the  consonant  action. 

All  the  above  varieties  will  be  explained  in  detail,  but  the  Reader  will  from 
this  sketch  of  the  Consonant  Alphabet,  understand  the  Mono-symbolic  plan  on 
which  it  is  constructed. 

The  following  Table  exhibits  the  Primary  Organic  Symbols,  and  the 
Diagrams  which  follow  explain  the  relation  of  each  Letter  to  the  Organic 

Configuration  which  produces  its  sound. 

G 


52 


i. 


Symbols.     Names. 

Back. 


2.  O 

3-  O 

4-  O 

5-  Va 

6-  Q 


Front. 
Point. 
Lip. 

Back-Mixed. 
Front-Mixed. 

Point-Mixed. 


8.     £)     Lip-Mixed. 


TABLE   OF   ORGANIC   SYMBOLS. 

Explanation. 

The  Back  of  the  Tongue  contracting  the  oral  passage 

between  it  and  the  soft  palate. 
The  Front  of  the  Tongue  contracting  the  oral  passage 

between  it  and  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 
The  Point  of  the  Tongue  contracting  the  oral  passage 

between  it  and  the  upper  gum. 
The  Lower  Lip  contracting  the  passage  between  it  and 

the  upper  lip,  while  the  tongue  lies  in  a  neutral 

'  natural  '  position. 
The  oral  passage  contracted  by  the  Back  of  the  Tongue 

and  the  Lips,  at  the  same  time. 
The  Front  and  the  Point  of  the  Tongue  both  raised,  so 

as  to  bring  the  convex  surface  of  the  tongue  close 

to  the  front  of  the  palatal  arch  and  the  point  of  the 

tongue,  at  the  same  time,  close  to  the  upper  gum. 
The  Point  and  the  Front  of  the  Tongue  both  raised  — 

the  latter  in  a  less  degree  than  for  Symbol  6,  — 

bringing  the  front  surface  of  the  tongue  near  the 

rim  of  the  palatal  arch. 
The  Lower  Lip  and  the  Back  of  the  Tongue  —  the  latter 

in  a  less  degree  than  for  Symbol  5,  —  contracting 

the  oral  passage  at  the  same  time. 


Modifiers. 

The  symbolized  action  farther  back. 
The  symbolized  action  farther  forward. 
The  Tongue  inverted  towards  the  Back  of  the  mouth. 


9.  \  Inner. 

10.  \  Outer. 

11.  c  Inverted. 

12.  o  Protruded.       The  Tongue  protruded  towards  the  Lips. 


53 


DIAGRAM    OF   THE   CONSONANT   ORGANIC    POSITIONS. 

The  centre  dotted  line,  in  each  of  the  following  Diagrams,  shows  the 
position  of  the  organs  in  forming  the  unmodified  Consonants.  The  positions  for 
the  'inner'  (\)  and  'outer'  (})  varieties  are  indicated  by  the  other  dotted  lines. 


5- 


6. 


7- 


54 

DESCRIPTION    OF   THE    'INNER'   AND    'OUTER'   VARIETIES 
OF   EACH    OF   THE    PRIMARY    CONSONANTS. 

f  C  {  The  Back  of  the  Tongue  depressed  below  the  soft  palate  forms  a 

sibilation  or  friction  of  the  breath  between  the  parynx  and  the  tongue. 

|  C I  The  Back  of  the  Tongue  raised  to  the  top  of  the  soft  palate,  with 

sibilation. 

f  O  {  The  Front  of  the  Tongue  curved  downwards  as  for  Oi  forms  a 

sibilation   between  the  highest  part  of  the  convex  organ   and   the 
2.  •{  '  inner '  or  posterior  part  of  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

j   O|  The  convex  tongue  directed  forward  at  the  top  of  the  palatal 

arch,  with  sibilation. 

O  {  The  Point  of  the  Tongue  turned  within  the  palatal  arch  forms  a 

sibilation  between  the  under  surface   of  the  tongue  and   the  front 
wall  of  the  palate. 
O  \  The  Point  of  the  Tongue  directed  forward  towards  the  teeth — 

without  centre-contact — forms   a   sibilation  between  the  tip  of  the 

3-  "( 

tongue  and  the  teeth. 

(J»c  The  Tongue  inverted,  forms  a  sibilant  aperture  between  its  point 

and  the  back  of  the  palate. 
(Jo  The  Point  of  the  Tongue  protruded,  forms  a  sibilant  aperture 

between  it  and  the  upper  lip. 
f  Q  \  The  Lower  Lip  forms  a  sibilant  aperture  between  its  inner  surface 

and  the  upper  teeth. 
j  Q  \  The    Upper    Lip    drawn    downwards    forms    a    sibilant    aperture 

between  its  centre  and  the  lower  teeth. 

f  Q\  In  forming  these  'inner'  and  'outer'  varieties  of  (%,  the  tongue 

1  QJ      takes  the  same  positions  as  for  the  corresponding  varieties  of  C>  but 

for  the  latter  the  lips  are  spread,  while  for  the  former  a  partial  effect 

of  O  modifies  the  '  Back  '  sibilation. 

f  Q  \  The  same  configuration   of  the  tongue  as  for  Q,  but  with  the 

I  Qj      point  of  the  tongue  drawn  back  to  the  edge  of  the  palatal  arch,  pro- 
duces the  '  inner,'  and  with  the  tongue  advanced  towards  the  teeth, 

produces  the  '  outer '  variety. 

f  £3  \  The  same  configuration  of  the  tongue  as  for  £J,  but  with  the  point 

I  £j> |      of  the  tongue  drawn  back  within  the  palatal  arch,  forms  the  'inner,' 

and  with  the  tongue  advanced  towards  the  teeth,  forms  the  '  outer ' 
[  variety. 


55 

In  forming  the  'inner'  and  'outer'  varieties  of  £),  the  lips  take 
the  same  positions  as  for  the  corresponding  varieties  of  symbol  Q  ; 
but  for  the  latter  the  tongue  lies  in  a  neutral  position,  while  for  the 
former,  a  partial  effect  of  C  modifies  the  lip  sibilation. 

The  sign  of  '  closeness '  (\)  applied  to  any  of  the  preceding  con- 
sonants denotes  a  narrower  aperture,  with  increased  sharpness  of 
sibilation  and  percussiveness  on  leaving  the  configuration  ;  and  the 
sign  of  'openness'  (Y)  denotes  a  widened  aperture  with  consequent 
dulness  of  sibilation  and  lessened  percussion.  Thus  in  forming  3 
with  '  closeness,'  a  mere  thread  of  breath  issues  through  the  narrow 
crevice  between  the  lips — as  in  blowing  to  cool ;  and  in  forming  QY, 
the  breath  flows  through  the  wide  orifice  with  the  effect  of  a  sigh  on 
the  lips.  The  latter  effect  is  interjectionally  expressive  of  faintness, 
or  want  of  air. 

(  The  sign  of  '  nasality '  applied  to  any  of  the  p/ecedjng  conson- 

ants, shows  that  the  breath  flows  through  the  nose  as  well  as  through 
the  symbolized  configuration.  The  effect  is  to  dull  the  oral  sibilation, 
and  to  deprive  the  transitional  action  of  percussiveness. 

$  The  sign  of  '  trill '  applied  to  C  or  to  C>  denotes  a  vibration  of 

the  uvula  ;  applied  to  O,  it  denotes  a  vibration  of  the  point  of  the 
tongue  ;  and  applied  to  Q  or  to  £),  it  denotes  a  vibration  of  the  lips. 

The  symbolic  curves  introduced  in  this  section  have  the  same  organic 
value  in  all  cases.  They  undergo  modifications  to  express  the  '  mechanical 
varieties'  of  consonants,  as  shown  in  the  following  Table:— 


56 


TABLE   OF   THE   MECHANICAL  VARIETIES  OF   CONSONANTS. 

All  consonants  belong  to  one  of  the  four  mechanical  classes  represented  by 
the  symbols  C  C  Q  Q  5  and  the  direction  in  which  the  curve  is  turned  uniformly 
denotes  the  organic  formation  of  the  consonant.  Thus  : — 

Symbols.                                 Names.  Explanation. 

(  C  O  O  O  Organic  Name,  (Back,  Front,  Point,  Lip.)  Organic  aperture 

!•    \  G  Q  £3  D           "            "       and  'Mixed.'  contracted  to  a 

I  centre  chink. 

f  C  CO  CO  3  "  "          "     '  Divided.'  Organic  aperture 

2.    \  C  &  &  3  "     '  Mixed  Divided.'  divided    by    a 

I  centre  check. 

3-  Q  O  O  O  "     '  Nasal.'  Mouth      passage 

shut  and  nasal 
passage  open. 

4-  O  Q  O  D  "     '  Shut.'  Oral  &  nasal  pas- 

sages both  shut. 

MODIFIERS  APPLICABLE  TO  'SHUT'  CONSONANTS. 

Symbols.         Names.  Explanation. 

5.  >      Emission  stopper.       Organic  separation  without  emission. 

6.  <k      Suction  stopper.          Suction  and  organic  separation  without  inhalation. 

7.  \       Side  opener.  Lateral  or 'divided '  termination  instead  of  organic 

recoil, 

8.  (       Nasal  opener.  Nasal  termination  instead  of  organic  recoil. 

The  following  Diagrams  exhibit  the  relation  of  the  mechanical  varieties  of 
Consonants  to  their  Symbols. 

Each  element  may  take  all  the  affections  of  '  inner,'  '  outer,'  '  close,'  &c. 
The  numbers  refer  to  the  descriptive  paragraphs  which  follow  the  Diagrams. 


57 


DIAGRAMS   OF   THE   MECHANICAL  VARIETIES   OF 

CONSONANTS. 

DIVIDED  CONSONANTS.  When  the  organs  are  so  placed  as  to  check  the 
breath  at  the  middle  of  the  oral  channel,  and  allow  of  its  emission  through 
interstices  at  the  sides  of  the  obstruction,  the  breath  issues  with  a  comparatively 
dull  hissing  or  '  lisping '  effect ;  and  the  subsequent  removal  of  the  centre 
obstruction  is  attended  with  a  slightly  percussive  flap,  which  is  the  essential 
characteristic  of  the  class  of  '  Divided '  Consonants. 

All  the  organic  positions  which  have  been  described  as  forming  Centre- 
aperture  or  '  Primary '  Consonants,  yield  also  Side-aperture  or  '  Divided ' 
formations. 

The  mutual  relations  of  the  '  Primary '  and  the  '  Divided '  Consonants,  and 
the  position  of  the  Centre-check  for  the  latter,  will  be  understood  from  the 
following  Diagrams  : — 


PRIMARY,  OR  CENTRE-APERTURE  CONSONANTS. 
Back.  Front.  Front  Point  Point. 

Mixed.  Mixed. 


Lip. 


DIVIDED,  OR  SIDE-APERTURE  CONSONANTS. 


Back. 


Front. 


Front. 
Mixed. 


Point. 
Mixed. 


Point. 


Lip. 


CD  3 

The  '  Shut '  and  the  '  Nasal '  Consonants  do  not  require  additional  illus- 
tration. The  oral  passage  is,  for  both  classes  of  elements,  uniformly  closed  by 
the  symbolized  organic  position.  [See  page  63.] 


58 

DESCRIPTION  OF  MECHANICAL  VARIETIES  OF  CONSONANTS 
[The  numbers  refer  to  the  Table,  page  56.] 

1.  PRIMARY  CONSONANTS. — The  elements  of  this  class  have  been  already  de- 

scribed in  detail.     [See  preceding  Section.] 

2.  DIVIDED  CONSONANTS. 

Symbols. 

G  The  '  Back-divided  '  Consonant  has  its  centre  check  at  the  uvula.  The 
whole  length  of  the  tongue  is  compressed  at  the  sides ;  and  there  is  gene- 
rally a  further  centre-contact  by  the  forepart  of  the  tongue  on  the  upper 
gum  ;  but  the  '  divided  '  aperture  commences  at  the  root  of  the  tongue, 
and  gives  the  peculiar  guttural  quality  which  characterises  this  element. 
This  is  perhaps  the  most  difficult  of  all  articulations  to  unpractised  organs. 
The  easier  C°CD  is  often  substituted  for  Q,  and  the  difference  in  effect  is 
very  slight. 

£J  This  is  the  same  formation  as  the  preceding,  with  modification  by  a 
contracted  lip  aperture. 

CO  The  '  Front-divided '  Consonant  has  its  side  apertures  within  the  palatal 
arch,  the  centre-check  being  given  by  the  convex  front  of  the  tongue  touch- 
ing the  front  wall  of  the  palate. 

£Q  The  '  Front-mixed  Divided '  Consonant  has  its  centre  check  at  the  tip 
of  the  Tongue,  and  its  apertures  between  the  edges  of  the  flattened  point 
and  the  teeth  or  the  upper  gum  ;— the  front  of  the  tongue  having  consi- 
derable convexity  within  the  arch  of  the  palate. 

Q  The  '  Point-Divided '  Consonant  has  its  apertures  over  the  sides  of  the 
middle  of  the  tongue — the  point  being  in  contact  with  the  upper  gum  ; 
the  front  surface  of  the  tongue  is  flattened  or  slightly  concave,  so  that  the 
apertures  are  large  and  productive  of  but  little  friction  or  sibilation.  From 
this  circumstance,  the  '  Point-divided  '  Consonant — which  is  always  vocal  in 
English — has  received  the  name  of  a  '  semi-vowel.'  The  articulative  recoil, 
by  removal  of  the  centre-check,  however,  gives  this  element  a  distinct  con- 
sonant quality. 

It  is  possible  to  pronounce  words  intelligibly — though,  of  course,  with  a 
peculiarity — while  the  point  of  the  tongue  is  held  in  contact  with  the 
palate.  This  singular  mode  of  utterance  was  at  one  time  prescribed  as  the 
secret  of  a  vaunted  method  for  the  cure  of  stammering.  The  '  cure '  was, 
certainly,  not  much  better  than  the  disease. 


59 

Symbols. 

2<S  The  '  point-mixed  divided '  Consonant  has  the  apertures  of  Q  narrowed 
by  convexity  of  the  front  of  the  tongue,  and  the  breath  is  in  consequence 
strongly  sibilant. 

Q  The  '  lip-divided  Consonant  is  formed  by  placing  the  centre  of  the  lower 
lip  on  the  edges  of  the  upper  teeth,  while  the  breath  hisses  through  the 
interstices  between  the  teeth,  or  between  the  teeth  and  the  lip. 

A  similar  effect  of  '  divided '  formation  results  from  placing  the  lower  on 
the  upper  lip,  instead  of  the  teeth,  and  directing  the  breath  over  the  corners 
of  the  lips.  This  peculiarity  would  be  represented  by  the  modifier  (o) 
('  to  lip  ')  after  the  '  lip-divided  '  symbol  (33)- 

J3  In  forming  3  the  tongue  lies  in  a  neutral  position,  and  the  friction  of 

the  breath  is  heard  only  on  the  lip.  For  the  '  lip-mixed  divided'  Consonant 
(£3),  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  retracted,  and  a  partial  effect  of  C  modifies 
the  labial  hiss. 

INNER  AND  OUTER  VARIETIES  OF  DIVIDED  CONSONANTS. 

The  'inner'  and  'outer'  formations  of  the  'divided'  Consonants  yield 
less  distinctive  sounds  than  those  of  the  Primary  or  Centre-aperture  class. 
The  'point-divided'  Consonant  (Q)  is,  however,  susceptible  of  all  varieties, 
'  inner,'  '  outer,'  '  inverted,'  '  protruded,'  &c.  ;  and  the  characteristic  sound  of 
£2  may  be  produced  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  planted  on  any  part  of  the 
palate.  The  '  lip-divided  '  Consonant  ( Q )  has  its  '  inner '  formation  when  the 
inner  surface,  instead  of  the  edge  of  the  lip,  is  brought  in  contact  with  the 
teeth ;  and  its  '  outer '  formation  when  the  upper  lip  is  drawn  down  to  meet 
the  lower  teeth. 

UNI-LATERAL  FORMATIONS. 

When  the  breath  issues  by  only  one  side  aperture  in  forming  any 
'  divided '  consonant,  the  modifier  X  cut  in  half  ( H )  furnishes  an  appropriate 
symbol  for  the  peculiarity. 

NASAL  CONSONANTS. 

When   the   organs   completely  close   the   passage   of  the   mouth   at   any 

point,    and    the    nasal  valve  is  open,   the    breath  issues   through   the  nostrils 

with   a  very  slight   effect   of  friction.     The  necessary  separation   of  the   oral 

The  '  shut '  consonants  are  susceptible  of  all  the  modifications  expressed 

H 


60 

organs  to  form  any  subsequent  vowel  gives  the  audibility  of  oral  effect  which 
is  essential  to  a  consonant. 

A  '  primary'  or  a  'divided'  consonant  modified  by  nasal  emission  is  said 
to  be  '  nasalized.'  A  '  shut '  consonant  becomes  a  pure  '  nasal/  and  is  altogether 
changed  in  character  by  the  opening  of  an  oral  channel  for  the  breath. 

The  organic  formation  of  the  pure  '  nasals '  corresponds  in  all  respects 
to  that  of  the  '  shut '  consonants.  The  number  of  the  elements  of  these  two 
classes  is  consequently  the  same.  The  mere  closing  of  the  nasal  valve  con- 
verts the  '  nasal '  Q  into  the  '  shut '  Q,  Q  into  Q,  &c,  without  any  action  of 
the  lips  or  the  tongue. 

The  English  'Nasals'  are  always  vocal;  [see  'Voiced  Consonants']  and 
when  the  nostrils  are  normally  free,  the  purity  of  the  voice  is  so  little  affected 
by  consonant  '  fricativeness,'  that  these  beautifully  sonorous  elements  have 
been  commonly,  though  improperly,  called  semi-vowels. 

They  may  rather,  while  the  oral  passage  remains  shut,  be  considered  as 
nasal  vowels  ;  and  they  are  often  used  by  themselves  as  syllables  when  their  con- 
figurations are  momentarily  '  held.'  But  in  transitional  formation  the  '  Nasals ' 
are  true  consonants. 

It  is  quite  possible,  after  a  little  practice,  to  utter  words  entirely  through 
the  nose,  while  the  lips  remain  closed.  The  effect  is  of  course  very  peculiar,  and 
in  many  cases  scarcely  intelligible.  But  the  motions  of  the  tongue  can  be  -heard, 
and  ears  accustomed  to  this  supremely  lazy  kind  of  articulation,  can  generally 
distinguish  vernacular  phrases  with  but  little  difficulty. 

SHUT  CONSONANTS. 

When  the  organs  completely  close  the  passage  of  the  throat  or  the  mouth 
at  any  point,  and  the  nasal  valve  is  also  shut,  there  is,  of  course,  no  emission 
until  the  separation  of  the  organs  ;  but  the  removal  either  of  the  oral  or  the 
nasal  check  is  attended  with  a  degree  of  percussiveness  proportioned  to  the 
pressure  on  the  confined  breath  during  the  organic  contact. 

The  lowest,  or  most  posterior  '  shut  consonant '  is  Xj  which  represents  a 
percussion  from  the  glottis.  There  can  be  no  '  inner '  variety  of  the  'catch;' 
but  an  'outer'  formation,  or  closure  of  the  super-glottal  passage  (Xi)>  yields  a 
distinct  percussion,  which  is  very  common  in  Chinese  and  in  many  other 
languages.  The  closure  is  effected  by  depression  of  the  epi-glottis,  as  in  the 
act  of  swallowing,  These  '  throat-shut '  consonants  can  have  no  nasal  corre- 
spondents. 


61 

When  a  '  shut '  consonant  precedes  the  '  nasal '  one  of  the  same  organic 
formation,  the  oral  organs  are  not  disjoined,  but  the  nasal  valve  is  simply 
opened;  as  in  pin  (D0)  and  dn  ((^CD)  in  the  words  chapman,  midnight,  &c. 
The  independent  completion  of  the  '  shut '  consonant  in  such  cases  would  be 
inconsistent  with  the  law  of  coalescence,  which  requires  all  the  elements  of  a 
word  to  be  joined  together  without  hiatus. 

The  nasal  termination  of  a  final  'shut'  consonant  is  a  peculiarity  which 
would  be  symbolized  by  subjoining  the  nasal  sign  to  the  consonant.  Thus  the 
'lip-shut'  symbol  (Q)  shows  the  complete  stoppage  of  the  mouth  by  closing 
the  lips;  but  it  implies  also  the  after-separation  of  the  lips.  The  'nasal'  sign 
subjoined  (Q()  would  signify  the  closing  of  the  lips,  and  the  subsequent  open- 
ing of  the  nasal  valve  while  the  lips  remain  closed. 

When  a  '  shut '  consonant  precedes  a  '  divided '  one,  formed  by  the  same 
organ — as  tl  (OCO),  dl  (QGO),  &c- — the  principle  of  coalescence  applies  in  the 
same  way  ;  the  '  shut '  consonant  is  finished  by  opening  only  the  side  apertures 
for  the  next  element  while  the  centre  contact  is  maintained  ;  as  in  the  words 
outlaiv,  heedless,  &c. 

The  'divided'  termination  of  a  final  'shut'  consonant  is  a  peculiarity 
for  which  .the  special  symbol  'side-opener'  (K)  is  provided.  Thus  the  'point- 
shut  '  symbol  (Q)  shows  the  closing  of  the  passage  of  the  mouth  by  the  point 
of  the  tongue,  but  it  implies  also  the  removal  of  the  tongue  from  the  palate. 
The  'side-opener'  subjoined  (OK)  would  signify  that  only  the  sides  of  the 
tongue  are  removed  while  the  point-contact  is  maintained.  The  opening  of  a 
single  lateral  passage  is  shown  by  one  half  of  the  modifier.  A  common  lingual 
'  click '  made  by  coachmen  to  incite  the  motion  of  a  horse  is  formed  by  this 
uni-lateral  termination  of  the  'point-shut'  consonant  (OH). 

The  '  shut '  consonants  are  sufficiently  distinguished  for  linguistic  purposes 
by  the  four  radical  varieties  '  Back,'  '  Front,'  '  Point,'  '  Lip,'  with  their  '  inner ' 
and  '  outer '  formations.  The  latter  correspond  with  the  '  inner '  and  '  outer ' 
positions  of  the  '  Primary'  Consonants,  as  before  described.  The  'inner'  '  Lip- 
shut  Consonant  is  formed  by  pressing  the  inner  surface  of  the  lower  lip  on  the 
upper  teeth  ;  and  the  '  outer '  by  pressing  the  upper  lip  on  the  lower  teeth,  so  as 
to  '  shut '  in  the  breath. 

The  simple  '  point-shut '  consonant  (Q)  may  be  written  before  or  after 
'  point-mixed '  (^5,  2*5,)  or  '  front-mixed  '  consonants  (Q,  2*2,)  because  the  coales- 
cence of  the  elements  is  implied  as  a  necessary  part  of  the  combinations. 


62 

by  A,  Y>  •>  \>  &>  &c-  The  'holder'  ({)  after  a  'shut'  consonant,  signifies  that 
the  contact  is  more  than  merely  transitional,  and  that  the  organs  are  not  im- 
mediately separated  as  a  part  of  the  articulative  impulse.  The  '  stop'  (•),  shows 
that  the  action  is  conjunctive  only  ;  and  the  '  emission-stopper  («>)  signifies  that 
the  organs  are  separated  after  contact,  but  that  the  breath  is  retained. 

CONSONANT  SUCTIONS. 

The  formation  of  the  '  shut '  consonants  by  suction  (<)  gives  rise  to  a 
peculiar  class  of  elements.  The  '  lip-shut '  symbol  followed  by  the  sign  of 
'suction'  (D<)  represents  a  sound  inter] ectionally  expressive  of  sudden  pain  ; 
but  there  may  be  suction  during  the  organic  contact  and  separation  of  the 
organs  without  ingoing  air.  For  this  effect  the  special  sign  '  suction  stopper'  (<•) 
is  provided.  The  'lip-shut'  (Q),  'point-shut'  (O),  and  'front-shut'  (Q)  actions 
performed  in  this  way,  and  the  '  point-shut'  with  side-termination  (OK),  pro- 
duce a  series  of  sounds  or  '  clicks'  which  are  very  common  in  interjectional 
or  inarticulate  utterance,  and  which  are  elements  of  ordinary  speech  in  some 
African  languages.  In  these  cases,  an  inner  closure  of  the  oral  organs  is  '  held  ' 
(Q-f),  while  the  anterior  suctions  are  made  ;  so  that  respiration  goes  on  freely 
through  the  nostrils  during  the  formation  of  a  series  of  the  '  suctions.' 

The  '  Back  Shut '  consonant  may  also  be  formed  by  suction  without 
ingoing  air  (Q<«)  ;  but  in  this  case  the  inner  closure  of  a  glottal  '  catch '  is 
necessarily  maintained  (X-)>  and  the  respiration  is  of  course  stopped. 

CONSONANT  ACTIONS   WITHOUT   BREATH. 

All  the  consonant  configurations  of  every  kind — Primary  and  Divided  as 
well  as  Shut — may  be  formed,  with  more  or  less  audibility,  without  either 
emission  or  suction.  If  the  breath  within  the  mouth  be  compressed  behind  the 
articulating  organs  while  an  inner  closure  is  held,  a  distinct,  and  in  some  cases, 
a  powerfully  percussive  effect  will  be  produced  on  the  abrupt  separation  of  the 
organs.  The  signs  £•  and  <k  represent  the  two  modes  of  this  mere  motion  of  the 
organs  of  speech. 

A  workman  in  using  the  blow-pipe,  maintains  the  '  Back-shut '  position  (Q-  {), 
and  the  muscular  compression  of  the  breath  enclosed  within  the  mouth,  between 
the  soft  palate  and  the  lips,  suffices  to  continue  the  slender  emission  while  the 
operator  breathes  through  his  nostrils. 

The  following  Diagrams  give  a  comparative  view  of  all  the  consonant 
organic  positions  represented  by  the  unmodified  Symbols  : — 


COMPARATIVE  DIAGRAMS  OF  THE  RADICAL  CONSONANT 

POSITIONS. 


G4 

EXAMPLE  SHOWING  THE  APPLICATION   OF  THE  MODIFIERS 
TO   A   SINGLE   CONSONANT   ACTION. 

Q          The  lips  closed  and  opened  (with  pressure  of  breath  implied.) 

Q  $       The  opening  of  Q  accompanied  with  vibration  of  the  lips. 

Qfl       The  closure  of  Q  followed  by  lateral  opening  of  the  lips. 

Qtt        The  closure  of  Q  followed  by  uni-lateral  opening.    [A  smoker's  puff.] 

QA       The  action  of  Q  with  strongly  conjunctive  closure. 

QY       1ne  action  of  Q  with  loose  closure. 

Q>        The  action  of  Q  finished  independently  of  the  next  element.    (Implied 
in  final  consonants.) 

Q-        The  closure  of  Q  without  after  separation  of  the  lips. 

Q  j       The  closure  of  Q  followed  by  opening  of  the  nasal  valve  instead  of  labial 
separation.     [A  suppressed  chuckle.] 

Q>       The  lips  closed  and  opened  with  accompanying  aspiration.    [An  interjec- 
tion of  contempt.] 

The  lips  closed  and  opened  with  accompanying  inspiration.    [An  inter- 
jection of  pain. 
The  lips  closed  with  pressure  of  breath,  and   opened  without  emission 

from  the  throat. 
The  lips  closed  with  suction,  and  opened  without  inhalation.    [A  kiss.] 

Q  {        The  closure  of   Q   '  held '  or  prolonged,  with  subsequent  separation  of 
the  lips. 

Q{-      The  closure  of  Q  prolonged,  without  subsequent  separation  of  the  lips. 
[Expressive  of  effort.] 

Qt        The  action  of  Q  very  abrupt. 

The  following  interjectional   Exercises  on   the   Consonant  Configurations 

may  be  usefully  pronounced  by  the  learner.     This  experimental  practice  will 

be  found  the  readiest   means  of  obtaining  a  correct  idea  of  the   Consonant 

positions : — 


65 


INTERJECTIONAL    EXERCISES 

ON  THE  RUDIMENTAL  CONSONANT  SYMBOLS. 


C I  disgust. 
C  $  \  snarling 
snoring. 


CH  hawking. 

CH  gargling. 

Q|  hissing. 

£3 1  hushing. 

(j$  hurrying. 

^)^3  silencing. 

Q^l  blowing  to  cool, 

Q<  sipping. 

3YI  faintness  from  heat. 

£)  |  a  semi-whistle. 

D  Oc3   incredulity. 

DOD 

3OI  distaste. 

G<  pain. 

*«\^  « 

3< 

C< 

o< 

C0<  acute  pain. 
O< 


Q-  quiet  sneering. 

Q- 
O- 
O- 

D<D<  sniffing. 

O|<  examination  of  odour 

QO       ridicule. 

ac\     " 


impatience. 
•  spitting. 

blowing    from    point   of 
tongue. 

D0O'<  sucking. 
•UCH  tasting. 
O<i  O<  Q<  vexation. 
O  IN  O  N  inciting. 


CICi 


a  suppressed  chuckle. 


Di 

QQH   snickering. 

QOH 

DOH 

DOH 

annoyance, 
incredulity. 


contempt. 


.DU 
DC 
DG 


D"^  kissing. 
DO  A  {<*  chirping. 
015O'OA{^3  sneezing, 
a  flap  of  the  tongue, 
a  clicking  flap. 
3<i          "  like   the 

gurgle  of  decanted  liquid. 
OCH    the  cry  of  a  quail. 
O CUt    the  grunt  of  a  pig. 
£3O$°O  t  thewhirrof  a  partridge. 

oi'oio  oi'oio  n{'o}o 

the  sound  of  a  grinding  wheel. 
CiCCiOi'OQ-   the  sound   of 
planing  wood. 


abhorrence. 


C  UJ  C  $<  C  V 


C  I  \>  O  {<  O  O  }  Q   the  sound  of  sawing  wood. 


G6 


VOICED   CONSONANTS. 

All  the  Consonant  actions  have  now  been  described,  but  each  of  them  gives 
rise  to  a  second  element  of  speech  when  the  organic  position  modifies  voice. 
This  uniform  addition  to  the  rudimental  sounds  is  symbolized  by  the  uniform 
addition  of  a  'voice-line'  (I)  to  the  rudimental  symbols.  The  'voice-line'  is 
inserted  within  the  consonant  curve.  Thus  : — 

Voiceless.  Voiced. 

occao  eeeeiG 

The  vocalized  Consonants  are  subject  to  the  same  affections  of  '  inner/ 
'  outer/  &c.,  as  the  non-vocal  elements.  If  therefore  the  Reader  has  mastered 
the  import  of  the  organic  and  modifying  symbols,  he  will  be  able,  without 
further  explanation,  to  understand  the  exact  phonetic  value  of  all  the  symbols 
for  Voiced  Consonants. 

The  following  Table  combines  into  one  Scheme  the  Radical  Consonant 
Elements,  vocal  and  non-vocal,  as  illustrated  in  the  Diagrams  of  their  mechanical 
and  organic  formation,  in  preceding  sections  : — 

GENERAL   SCHEME   OF   CONSONANTS. 
Voiceless.  Voiced. 


•si? 


z 


•B      3? 
5      SS 


T*  -2  " 

I    *i 


Throat 

Back  of  Tongue. 
Front  of     do. 
Point  of      do. 
Lip. 


o 

0 

X 

e 

*• 

c 

c 

C 

£ 

a 

a 

C 

e 

8 

e 

G 

a 

o 

Q 

CO 

S3 

Q 

o 

O 

^ 

CD 

9Q 

CD 

CD 

o 

O 

CD 

as 

a 

05 

Q 

Ci5 

00 

as 

O 

0) 

o 

D 

3 

3 

D 

9 

3 

B 

3 

8 

G 

9- 

67 

IMPERFECT  AND  VARIABLE  VOCALITY  OF  CONSONANTS. 

All  consonants  being  merely  transitional  sounds  in  ordinary  utterance,  the 
voice  is  not  equally  sustained  from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  the  vocalized 
articulation.  In  pronouncing  the  word  leave,  for  instance,  the  vocality  of  the  v 
is  clearly  heard  only  at  the  junction  of  that  element  with  the  syllabic  sound — 
the  vowel ;  and  the  initially  voiced  v  sinks  imperceptibly  into  its  voiceless  cor- 
respondent f — as  if  the  word  were  written  leavf.  This  effect  does  not  require  to 
be  written,  as  it  is  inherent  in  the  implied  transitional  character  of  the  consonant. 

When  a  voiced  consonant  comes  before  a  non-vocal  element,  the  murmur 
of  the  vocal  letter  is  heard  only  at  the  instant  of  its  junction  with  the  preceding 
vowel,  and  immediately  lost  in  the  transition  to  the  next  element,  as  in  the 
words  art,  purse,  else,  felt,  lance,  cant,  lamp,  ink,  &c.  The  abrupt  effect  of  /  m  n 
ng  in  such  words  might  almost  be  written  GDDOQ>  instead  of  Q00^I3G>  but  as 
there  is  a  trace  of  vocality,  the  latter  are  the  correct  elements. 

Foreigners,  in  pronouncing  English  words,  generally  fail  to  give  the  requisite 
abruptness  to  these  'liquids'  before  voiceless  consonants.  The  foreign  pronun- 
ciation of  felt,  for  example,  is  OlOOlO-  The  native  sound  would  be  written 
31GO<U  or  31GOQU>  were  not  the  imperfect  vocality  of  the  I  implied  in  the 
combination. 

Of  course,  where  the  voiceless  correspondent  of  a  vocal  consonant  is  sepa- 
rately heard  before  or  after  the  latter,  both  elements  should  be  written  ;  as  in  a 
common  dialectic  pronunciation  of  the  German  word  so  (Q^53-{)- 

The  preceding  observations  show  that  the  absolute  '  quantity '  of  voice  in 
a  vocal  consonant  depends  on  the  nature  of  the  following  element  Thus  the 
I  in  felt  (31GOU)  though  extremely  short,  does  not  require  the  mark  of  abrupt- 
ness, because  it  is  cut  short  by  the  t,  in  accordance  with  the  law  of  coalescence 
of  syllabic  elements ;  and  the  /in  felt  [foreign]  (3100IO)  requires  the  mark  of 
long  quantity  ('  holder ')  to  express  the  peculiarity  of  its  prolongation  before  a 
voiceless  consonant,  although  the  sound  is  really  shorter  than  the  final  /  in  fell, 
which  would  be  expressed  by  GO  alone.  Five  degrees  of  absolute  quantity  in 
the  sound  of  I  will  be  recognised  in  the  following  combinations ;  but  no  mark 
of  distinction  is  necessary  in  writing,  because  in  each  case  the  consonant  has 
the  normal  quantity  due  to  the  associated  elements. 

1.  (shortest)  felt  3 1  GOO 

2.  (longer)  health         OtCOS^ 

3.  (longer)  felled  3100Q 

4.  (longer)  realm 

5.  (longest)  fell 


68 

HELD  CONSONANTS. 

When  the  organic  configuration  for  any  consonant — vocal  or  voiceless — is 
maintained, — otherwise  than  normally  in  a  combination,  as  above  explained, — 
the  element  has  a  distinctive  character,  which  is  denoted  by  the  sign  '  holder'  ({). 
The  consonants  are  often  thus  lingeringly  formed  for  elocutionary  effect,  as  in 
the  lines : 

"  Roll  on  (|),  thou  deep  and  dark  blue  ocean,  roll  (|)" 

"  Hush(|)cd,  hush(|)ed  !  How  is  it  that  I  call 

And  that  thou  answerest  not  ? 
When(|)  was  it  thus  ?  Woe,  woe,  for  all 

The  love  ({)  my  soul  forgot !" 
"  Stop({)  !  for  thy  tread  is  on  an  empire's  dust !" 

A  voiced  consonant  when  '  held,'  before  a  vowel  or  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
produces  the  effect  of  a  syllable ;  and  the  sounds  of  I  m  11 — the  most  sonorous  of 
all  consonants — are  in  English  words  frequently  syllabic  ;  as  in  castfc,  apple,  tabfc, 
chasw,  rhythw,  lis(te)«,  kitt(e);z,  butt(o);/,  &c.  The  syllabic  quality  of  a  '  held  ' 
consonant  will  be  distinctly  perceived  after  a  vowel,  as  in  the  words  lis(te)njer, 
but(to)n}ing,  &c.  Such  words  are,  however,  often  contracted  into  dissyllables 
(GOIQOJIV,  G3DG3IG,  &c.)  ;  but  the  compound  word  apple-eyed  (IDGOMCD) 
contrasted  with  the  word  applied  (IDC037iQ) — which  is  othenvise  identical  in  its 
elements — will  clearly  manifest  the  difference  between  a  '  held,'  and  a  normally 
'  transitional '  consonant. 

CONSONANT  COMBINATIONS. 

There  is  no  reason  why  all  consonants  should  not  be  expressed  in  the  same 
manner,  whether  they  occur  singly  or  in  combinations.  Separate  characters  for 
the  double  elements  in  such  words  as 

(EnglisJi}  cheer  [tsh]         (German}  zeit  [ts] 

(       „       )  jeer     [dzh]         (Italian}    mezzo  [dz],  &c., 

are  either  superfluous  or  they  are  requisite  in  all  cases  of  similar  combinations  ; 
such  as  (EnglisJi}  tr,  dw,  cl,  gz,  &c. ;  (German}  pf,  &c. 

English  eyes  might  perhaps  prefer  a  single  type  for  the  sound  of  J  and  G 
in  John,  George,  &c. ;  or  for  X  in  six  ;  but  French  readers  would  not  share  the 
prejudice  in  the  former  case,  nor  Spanish  readers  in  the  latter.  Italians  might 
perhaps  prefer  a  single  type  for  the  sound  of  their  C  in  citta  [English  ch],  but 


69 

neither  English  nor  French  readers  would  partake  the  feeling,  as  they  are  ac- 
customed to  associate  a  single  though  variable  sound  with  the  letter  C. 

In  a  UNIVERSAL  ALPHABET  all  compounds  must  be  written  analytically. 

Some  persons  fail  to  perceive  the  compound  nature  of  sounds  which  they 
have  been  accustomed  to  express  by  a  single  letter.  But  it  should  be  borne  in 
mind  that,  though  the  two  elements  d  and  zh  are  undoubtedly  present  in  the 
English  J  ;  and  t  and  sh  in  the  Italian  C  (before  e  and  i]  ;  the  first  element  is 
not  finished  independently,  but — by  the  law  of  coalescence,  which  compacts  the 
elements  of  a  syllable  and  the  syllables  of  a  word — the  second  consonant  takes 
the  place  of  the  ordinary  '  recoil '  which  the  first  element  would  receive  in  sepa- 
rate pronunciation.  Each  consonant,  in  fact,  loses  part  of  its  normal  sound  when 
two  are  combined  in  one  syllable. 

GLIDES. 

The  Primary'  or  Centre-aperture  Consonants,  as  we  have  seen,  are  formed 
by  the  breath  or  the  voice — compressed  behind  the  articulating  organs — issuing 
with  a  degree  of  friction,  sibilation,  or  buzzing,  through  a  narrow  passage  over 
the  '  Back,'  the  '  Front,'  the  '  Point/  &c.,  of  the  tongue,  or  between  the  '  Lips.' 
When  the  configurative  channel  is  so  far  expanded  as  to  remove  compression 
or  buzzing  from  the  voice,  a  series  of  semi-consonant,  semi-vowel  sounds  results, 
which  we  call  '  Glides.'  These  elements  are  only  transitional  sounds.  If  they 
had  a  '  fixed  configuration,'  they  would  be  vowels,  and  would  form  syllables ;  as 
even  the  closer  consonants  do  when  their  configuration  is  '  held.' 

The  '  Glides '  being  thus  intermediate  to  consonants  and  vowels,  are  appro- 
priately represented  by  the  organic  consonant  curves  joined  subordinately  to 
vowel  stems  ;  thus  I  fi  f  ^,  &c.  The  '  Glides  '  unite  with  vowels  to  form  '  diph- 
thongs,' or  double  sounds  with  a  single  syllabic  impulse.  The  vowel  '  stems  ' 
(If)  are  now  specifically  employed  by  themselves  to  denote  non-syllabic  vowel 
murmurs. 

The  latter  sounds  are  very  common  in  the  mouths  of  speakers,  and  much 
of  the  characteristic  effect  of  individual  utterance  depends  on  these  delicate 
'  Glides.'  Many  persons,  for  instance,  habitually  use  the  '  Voice-glide '  (J)  or  the 
'  Round-glide '  (f )  in  commencing  or  finishing  other  elements  ;  and,  however 
accurately  the  vowels  and  consonants  of  such  speakers  might  be  written,  the 
result  would  not  be  a  perfect  representation  of  their  utterance  without  the  inter- 
polated transitional  sounds. 


70 

It  is  the  aim  of  this  System  of  Letters  to  write  every  sound  which  the 
mouth  can  make,  and  to  represent  it  exactly  as  the  mouth  makes  it.  Such 
minute  symbolization  is  not  called  for  in  the  ordinary  writing  of  languages  ;  but 
the  power  must  be  inherent  in  a  Universal  Alphabet ;  because  the  peculiarities 
of  utterance  which,  as  idiosyncrasies,  may  be  passed  unheeded  in  writing  a 
speaker's  language  may  possibly  be  essential  characteristics  of  vernacular  pro- 
nunciation in  some  part  of  the  world. 

The  following  is  a  complete  Table  of  the  '  Glides.' 


:OMPLETE  TABLE  OF  THE  GLIDES. 


Symbol.         Name. 
i.  >     Breath-Glide. 


2.  I  Voice-Glide. 

3.  J  Round-Glide. 

4.  J  Throat- Glide. 

5.  I  Back-Glide. 

6.  \  Back  Round-Glide. 

7.  fi  Front-Glide. 

8.  ^  Front  Round-Glide. 

9.  y  Point-Glide. 

10.  ¥  Point  Round-Glide. 

11.  \  Lip-Glide. 

12.  I  Lip  Round-Glide. 


Explanation. 

A  Transitional  aspiration,  of  organic  quality  corre- 
sponding to  that  of  the  adjoining  elements 
[=  a  soft  effect  of  GOOD,  &c.] 

Vowel  murmur  [=  a  non-syllabic  effect  of  \.] 

Rounded  murmur  [=  a  non-syllabic  effect  of  \.] 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of  0. 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of  G. 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of  (£. 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of  (•)• 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of  Q,  with  lip  modifica- 
tion. 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of  Q. 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of  Q,  with  lip  modifica- 
tion. 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of  Q. 

A  semi-vowelized  sound  of    ). 


VOWEL  RELATIONS  OF  THE  GLIDES. 

No.  4  resembles  the  vowel  J  ;  No.  5  resembles  the  vowel  ]  or  1  ;  No.  6  re- 
sembles the  vowel  }  ;  No.  7  resembles  the  vowel  I :  No.  8  resembles  the  vowel  f  ; 
No.  9  resembles  the  vowel  I ;  No.  10  resembles  the  vowel  J  ;  No.  1 1  resembles 
the  vowel  I ;  No.  12  resembles  the  vowel  ^. 


VOWELS. 

A  '  Vowel'  is  a  syllabic  sound  moulded  by  a  definite  and  momentarily  fixed, 
or  tense,  configuration  of  the  free  channel  of  the  mouth,  and  creating  no  oral 
sibilation  or  friction  in  its  emission.  A  vowel  without  a  '  fixed '  configuration 
loses  its  syllabic  effect,  and  becomes  a  '  glide  ;'  and  a  'glide'  with  sibilation  or 
friction  in  the  oral  channel  becomes  a  '  consonant.'  Consonants,  like  glides,  are 
merely  transitional  sounds  ;  but  their  configurations  may  be  '  held '  so  as  to 
receive  syllabic  impulse,  in  which  case  a  consonant  without  a  vowel  has  the 
effect  of  a  syllable.  All  vowels  make  syllables. 

Primary  vowels  are  those  which  are  most  allied  to  consonants,  the  voice- 
channel  being  expanded  only  so  far  as  to  remove  all  '  fricative '  quality.  The 
same  organic  adjustments  form  'wide'  vowels  when  the  resonance-cavity  is 
enlarged  behind  the  configurative  aperture ; — the  physical  cause  of  'wide'  quality 
being  retraction  of  the  soft  palate,  and  expansion  of  the  pharynx. 

Voice,  as  formed  in  the  throat,  may  be  said  to  have  no  vowel  quality.  It 
derives  the  latter  entirely  from  the  shape  and  size  of  the  voice-channel  in  the 
throat  and  the  mouth.  Thus  ee  and  ah  are  one  sound  in  the  throat ;  but,  for 
ee,  the  convex  front  of  the  tongue  must  be  elevated  and  advanced  close  to  the 
front  of  the  palatal  arch,  so  as  to  contract  the  oral  channel  in  the  greatest  degree  ; 
while,  for  ah,  the  root  or  back  of  the  tongue  must  be  retracted,  and  depressed 
below  the  edge  of  the  soft  palate,  so  as  to  enlarge  the  oral  channel  in  the  greatest 
degree.  The  point  of  greatest  contraction,  or  the  '  configurative  aperture,'  may 
be  shifted  to  any  part  of  the  back  or  the  front  of  the  palatal  arch ;  and  every 
different  attitude  of  the  tongue  produces  some  change  in  the  shape  and  dimen- 
sions of  the  oral  cavity,  and  consequently  a  change  of  vowel  quality. 

The  sounds  resulting  from  the  various  adjustments  of  the  tongue  to  the 
palate  are  susceptible  of  an  additional  modification  from  the  contraction  or 
'  rounding'  of  the  guttural  passage, — and,  probably,  of  the  upper  aperture  of  the 
larynx, — accompanied  by  a  corresponding  modification  of  the  buccal  cavities 
and  of  the  external  aperture  of  the  lips.  All  the  palato-lingual  vowels  may 
undergo  this  change.  The  dimensions  of  the  labial  orifice  vary  in  accordance 
with  those  of  the  oral  channel ;  thus,  to  '  round '  the  narrow  sound  of  ee,  the 
labial  orifice  is  reduced  to  little  more  than  a  chink  ;  while  the  broad  aperture  of 
ah  is  '  rounded '  by  contracting  only  the  corners  of  the  lips. 


72 

The  vowels — whether  '  Primary,'  '  Wide/  or  '  Rounded  ' — are  divided  into 
three  classes  of  palato-lingual  formations,  according  as  the  oral  cavity  is  moulded 
mainly  by  the  '  Back/  the  '  Front/  or  the  '  Mixed '  (Back  and  Front)  attitudes 
of  the  tongue.  The  '  Back '  vowels  have  the  largest  oral  cavities,  the  tongue 
being  disengaged  from,  or  depressed  below,  the  line  of  the  upper  teeth  ;  the 
'  Mixed '  vowels  have  smaller  cavities,  the  edges  of  the  tongue  being  raised  to 
the  sides  of  the  teeth  ;  and  the  '  Front '  vowels  have  the  smallest  cavities,  the 
convex  tongue  being  elevated  within  the  arch  of  the  palate. 

The  general  outline  of  the  palato-lingual  channel  for  the  three  classes  of 
vowels  will  be  understood  from  a  comparison  of  the  Diagrams  at  page  73. 

VOWEL   SYMBOLS. 

The  symbol  of  '  Voice '  (I)  is  the  basis  or  '  stem '  of  all  the  vowel  letters. 
To  this  'stem'  a  'Primary'  or  a  'Wide'  'Definer'  is  added,  to  show  the 
organic  formation  of  the  sounds.  The  '  Definer'  is  joined  to  the  inner  or  left 
side  of  the  stem  for  '  Back '  vowels  ;  to  the  outer  or  right  side  for  '  Front ' 
vowels  ;  and  to  both  sides  of  the  '  stem '  for  '  Mixed '  vowels.  The  '  Definer ' 
for  '  Primary'  vowels  is  a  dot  (1),  and  for  'Wide'  vowels,  a  hook  (]_). 

Three  degrees  of  elevation  of  the  tongue  in  its  '  Back/  '  Front/  or  '  Mixed' 
attitudes,  are  discriminated  by  the  position  of  the  '  Definers '  on  the  vowel 
'  stem.'  The  '  Definers  '  stand  at  the  upper  end  of  the  stem  for  the  '  high  '  vowel 
of  each  class  ;  at  the  lower  end  for  the  '  low ;'  and  at  both  ends  for  the  '  mid ' 
vowel  of  each  series.  Thus  : — 

VOWEL  SYMBOLS. 
PRIMARY  VOWELS.  WIDE  VOWELS. 


Back. 

Mixed. 

Front. 

Back. 

Mixed. 

Front. 

High, 

1 

I 

I 

1 

1 

I 

Mid, 

3 

I 

c 

3 

I 

C 

Low, 

J 

I 

I 

J 

I 

T 

The  relation  of  the  Symbols  to  the  organic  positions  is  exhibited  in  the 
next  Section. 


73 


RELATIVE  ORGANIC  FORMATION  OF  VOWELS. 
The  relative  positions  of  the  tongue  to  the  palate  indicated  by  the  Vowel 
Symbols  will  be  understood  by  comparing  the  following  series  of  Diagrams. 
From  the  '  Low  Back '  to  the  '  High  Front '  positions,  the  cavity  of  the  mouth 
is  progressively  diminished  ;  the  '  Mixed '  vowels  being  intermediate  to  the 
'  Back '  and  '  Front '  vowels.  Conversely,  the  progressive  enlargement  of  the 
vowel  cavity  will  be  seen  on  comparing  the  Diagrams  in  the  order  from  i  to  9. 


Back. 

7- 


High. 


f^L 

1 


Mixed. 


Front. 
I. 


ff-       -p- 

(b 


Mid. 


5- 


2. 


?^ v 

r     Ifa 


Low. 


6. 


74 


The  following  additional  illustrations  of  the  relative  apertures  of  the  '  Front' 
vowels  will  help  the  reader  to  a  clear  understanding  of  the  mechanical  cause  of 
variations  in  vowel  quality.  The  eye  is  supposed  to  look  down  on  the  convex 
surface  of  the  tongue  through  the  roof  of  the  mouth.  The  front  line  is  the  rim 
of  the  palatal  arch. 

Relative  Apertures  of  Front  Vowels. 
Hiyh  (Narrow.)  Mid.  Low  (Broad.) 


The  following  Diagram  presents  a  further  illustration  of  the  Scale  formed 
by  the  progression  of  the  '  configurative  aperture '  for  the  radical  Lingual  Vowels. 
[See  'Modulated  Whisper!']  The  diagram  combines  in  one  view  the  series  of 
nine  positions  separately  illustrated  at  page  73. 

SCALE   OF   LINGUAL   VOWELS. 


7.5 


RELATION   OF   VOWEL   TO    CONSONANT    POSITIONS. 

The  various  positions  of  the  tongue  which  produce  '  centre-aperture '  Con- 
sonants, form  vowels  when  the  channel  between  the  organs  is  sufficiently 
expanded  and  firm  to  allow  the  breath  to  pass  without  oral  friction  or  sibilation- 
The  vowel  positions  thus  bear  a  definite  relation  to  the  Consonant  attitudes  of 
the  different  parts  of  the  tongue.  A  knowledge  of  these  elementary  relations 
will  enable  learners  who  are  acquainted  with  the  simple  consonant-frictions  to 
interpret  the  Vowel  Symbols  with  uniformity  in  different  countries. 

The  'Back'  Vowels  are  allied  to  the  'Back'  Consonant  and  its  'inner' 
and  'outer'  varieties;  the 'inner' consonant  corresponding  to  the  'Low-Back' 
vowel,  and  the  {  outer'  to  the  '  High-Back'  vowel. 

The  '  Front '  vowels  are  allied  to  the  '  Front '  consonant  and  its  '  inner ' 
and  'outer'  varieties;  the  'outer'  consonant  corresponding  to  the  'High- 
Front  '  vowel,  and  the  '  inner '  to  the  '  Low-Front '  vowel. 

The  '  Mixed '  vowels  are  allied  to  the  '  Point '  consonant  and  the  '  Mixed  ' 
Point-and-Front  varieties.  The  '  Front-Mixed '  consonant  corresponds  to  the 
'High-Mixed'  vowel;  the  'Point-Mixed'  consonant  to  the  'Mid-Mixed' 
vowel  ;  and  the  '  Point-Consonant '  to  the  '  Low-Mixed '  vowel. 

The  '  Mid-Mixed '  vowel  brings  the  tongue  into  the  ordinary  position  of 
rest  ;  the  '  Back'  and  '  Front'  surfaces  of  the  tongue  are  equi-distant  from  the 
corresponding  parts  of  the  palate,  and  the  quality  of  the  sound  is  neutral.  This, 
therefore,  may  be  called  the  '  Natural  Vowel '  position. 

These  Vowel  and  Consonant  Relations  are  illustrated  in  the  following 
Table  : 


MUTUAL   RELATIONS    OF   'PRIMARY'    CONSONANTS   AND 

VOWELS. 

Consonants.      Vowels.      Consonants.     Vowels.      Consonants.       Vowels. 


c\ 

1 

Q 

I 

or 

I 

c 

3 

V 

I 

O 

c 

Cl 

J 

O 

I 

01 

I 

K 


76 


LIP-MODIFIED  OR  'ROUND'  VOWELS. 

All  the  varieties  of  '  Primary '  and  '  Wide '  vowels  hitherto  explained, 
result  from  the  shape  and  size  of  the  cavity  of  the  mouth  as  affected  by  the 
Tongue,  while  the  lips  remain  spread  so  as  not  to  influence  the  sound.  The 
same  lingual  positions  yield  another  series  of  vowels  when  the  voice-channel  is 
'  rounded '  and  the  aperture  of  the  lips  contracted.  The  mechanical  cause  of 
'  round '  quality  commences  in  the  super-glottal  passage,  and  extends  through 
the  whole  mouth-tube,  by  lateral  compression  of  the  buccal  cavities  and  reduc- 
tion of  the  labial  aperture.  The  last  cause — lip-modification — being  the  'visible' 
cause  of  '  round '  quality,  is  assumed  as  representative  of  the  effect 

The  amount  of  lip-modification  corresponds  to  the  degree  of  elevation  of 
the  tongue  ;  '  High'  vowels  have  the  narrowest  labial  aperture  ;  '  Low'  vowels 
the  broadest ;  and  '  Mid '  vowels  an  intermediate  aperture. 

This  uniform  addition  of  lip-modification  is  symbolized  by  a  uniform 
addition  to  the  vowel  '  stem.'  The  symbol  expresses  the  organic  action  by  an 
obvious  analogy.  The  lips  are  drawn  across  the  aperture  of  a  lingual  vowel  in 
order  to  '  round  '  its  quality  ;  and  the  resulting  effect  is  symbolized  by  a  short 
line  drawn  across  the  voivel  'stem?  Thus  :  1  I  f ,  &c. 

The  'rounded'  vowels  are  called  'High-Back  Round'  (J),  'High-Back 
Wide  Round '  (J),  &c.  ;  the  syllable  '  Round '  being  added  to  the  name  of  the 
Tongue-vowel  symbol. 

The  effect  of  '  round '  modification,  not  being  dependent  on  the  lips  alone, 
is  producible — with  some  peculiarity — without  contraction  of  the  labial  aperture  ; 
and  this  inner  '  rounding'  is  practised  as  a  concealment  by  ventriloquists.  The 
sign  of  'inner'  formation  may  be  used  to  denote  this  mode  of  pronunciation. 
Thus  :  iJ  [oo,  rounded  without  the  lips.] 

The  Reader  will  now  have  a  definite  idea  of  the  oral  configurations  repre- 
sented by  the  symbols  of  '  Round '  vowels,  as  shown  in  the  following  Table  : — 


77 


SYMBOLS  OF  '  ROUND  '  VOWELS. 


PRIMARY. 

Back.    Mixed.    Front. 
High.         \  \  f 


WIDE. 
Back.     Mixed.    Front. 

1  I  f 


Relative  Lip 
Aperture, 


Mid.         }  t 


Low. 


Other  faintly  different  shades  of  vowel  sound  are  possible  ;  as,  for  instance, 
from  giving  a  greater  or  less  than  the  ordinary  or  symmetrical  degree  of  lip- 
modification.  Even  these  delicate  varieties  may  be  perfectly  expressed  by  the 
modifiers  '  close  '  (A),  '  open  '  (Y),  '  inner  '  ({).  '  outer  '  (\\  or  by  '  linked  '  symbols  ; 
but  such  compound  letters  can  never  be  required  in  the  writing  of  languages, 
except  to  show  the  curiously  minute  accuracy  with  which  these  plastic  physio- 
logical symbols  may  be  applied. 


NASALIZED  VOWELS. 

When  the  nasal  valve  is  opened  simultaneously  with  the  formation  of  a 
vowel,  the  breath  or  voice  issues  partly  through  the  nostrils  and  partly  through 
the  oral  configuration.  This,  with  a  degree  of  'gliding'  semi-consonant 
contraction  in  the  guttural  passage,  is  the  formation  of  the  common  French 
sounds  represented  by  n  after  a  vowel  letter.  To  indicate  the  '  mixed-nasal '  or 
naso-guttural  quality  of  these  elements,  the  special  symbol  f  is  provided.  The 
symbol  is  formed  by  uniting  0  subordinately  with  the  ordinary  nasal  sign  (. 


78 

The  precise  oral  qualities  of  the  French  nasals  must  be  settled  by  native 
orthoepists.     We  write  in  accordance  with,  at  least,  a  very  general  usage, 

Examples. 

an)  Tn         I?3a    B^-SH?3!?- 


en 
in 


] 


on 


un 


ENFIN.      MON-ENFANT. 


CHACUN  —  A   SON   GOUT. 


Partial  nasality  without  guttural  modification — such  as  is  heard  in  some  of 
the  American  dialects,  and  from  individual  speakers — is  represented  by  the 
ordinary  nasal  sign  (()  placed  after  the  affected  vov/el. 

Any  vowel  may  be  nasalized. 

VOWELS  OF  GLIDING  QUALITY— DIPHTHONGS. 

All  the  Vowel  Symbols  represent  sounds  of  '  fixed '  configuration — 
monophthongs  ;  but  many  syllabic  sounds  have  a  superadded  gliding  quality, 
which  converts  them  into  '  diphthongs  '  or  double  sounds.  The  second  element 
of  an  ordinary  diphthong  is  not,  however,  another  vowel,  as  it  has  neither  '  fixed 
configuration '  nor  '  syllabic  impulse.'  The  initial  element  is  a  vowel ;  the 
second  is  a  transitional  sound  or  '  glide,'  and  the  two,  in  combination,  form  but  a 
single  syllable. 

The  difference  between  a  '  diphthong,'  thus  explained,  and  a  combination  of 
two  vowels,  will  be  manifest  on  comparing  the  diphthong  I  in  knives  (H^TiQ^) 
with  the  dissyllabic  combination  of  the  same  sounds  in  naive  (G33I3)  J  or  the 
diphthongal  a  infamous  (3C?iB3Q)  w^tn  tne  dissyllabic  compound  of  the  same 
sounds  in  phaeton  (3CIDJ0)- 

The  diphthongal  quality  of  the  English  a  will  not,  at  first,  be  admitted  by 
every  reader  ;  but  the  double  quality  of  the  sound  cannot  fail  to  be  apprehended 
in  slow  pronunciation  or  in  singing  ;  or,  better,  by  contrasting  the  English  with 
the  Scotch  pronunciation  of  any  word  containing  a  under  accent.  The  Scotch 
a  is — like  the  French  e — a  monophthong.  Thus  : 

[Scotch:]   3CJGO,  [English:]   3CMO,/<w7. 

A  diphthongal  glide  may  be  a  transition  either  towards  the  '  natural '  vowel 
(see  page  75)  or  its  '  rounded '  correspondent ;  or  towards  the  configuration  for 


II 

u 

JI 

II 

IX 

II 

n 

J5 

15 

IX 

15 

15 

I! 

U 

ex 

n 

U 

JX 

U 

IX 

u 

U 

J* 

IX 

n 

79 

a  '  centre  aperture '  consonant  vowelized,  i.e.,  formed  without  the  friction  or 
buzzing  of  a  consonant.  All  monosyllabic  diphthongs  are  accurately  sym- 
bolized by  the  appropriate  'glide'  placed  after  the  initial  vowel.  In  such  words 
as  cruel,  Creole,  &c.,  two  vowels,  and  consequently  two  syllables,  are  heard. 

The  following  examples,  which  include  only  a  few  out  of  the  vast  number  of 
possible  '  diphthongs,'  will  furnish  the  Reader  with  a  useful  organic  exercise. 

EXAMPLES  OF  DIPHTHONGS. 

fli  II  II 

IX  Cl          fl 

tx       u       « 

«       II       11 

\l  Cl          tl 

i«  ix  n  w  ix  ix  u  11 

a  is  j¥  iv  ix  ix-  u  n 

n  iv  ji  n  ex  H  31  ji 

n  u  ji  u  n  JA  ji  ji 

VOWEL  QUANTITY. 

The  vowel  symbols  imply  ordinary  '  short '  quantity,  as  the  words  it,  if,  ill, 
&c.  Abruptness  (<),  and  prolongation  (}),  are  separately  denoted. 

The  absolute  length  of  a  syllable  is  greatly  dependent  on  the  nature  of  the 
elements  which  follow  the  syllabic  vowel ;  as  in  the  words 

seek,  seem,  see.  root,  room,  rue.  late,  lain,  lay. 

goad,  goal,  go.  sought,  sawed,  saw.  right,  rhyme,  wry. 

fork,  form,  for.  curt,  curl,  cur.  deck,  dealt,  dell, 

bit,  built,  bill.  hat,  hank,  hand.  rot,  romp,  wrong. 

Vowels  before  non-vocal  consonants  are  always  shorter  than  before  voiced 
consonants,  or  when  final,  under  accent.  Such  differences  do  not  require  to  be 
indicated,  as  they  are  implied  in  the  nature  of  the  combinations.  The  vowel  in 
the  word  meet,  for  instance,  is  considerably  shorter  than  in  the  words  meal  or  me; 
but,  notwithstanding  the  shortening  influence  of  the  voiceless  consonant  in  meet, 
the  vowel  should  have  the  same  mark  of  long  quantity  as  in  meal,  because  it  is 
'  long '  as  compared  with  its  '  short '  correlative  in  meet  (Scotch)  or  mit  (German), 


80 

and  only  further  lengthened  by  its  association  with  the  vocal  I  The  '  short '  cor- 
relative of  the  sound  '  meal '  is  heard  in  the  French  '  mille.' 

The  reader  will  bear  this  principle  in  mind,  and  not  pronounce  all  long 
vowels  equally  long,  or  all  short  vowels  equally  short. 

Extra  prolongation  of  a  vowel — as  in  drawling — may  be  shown  by  doubling 
the  sign  of  long  quantity  (|{).  Four  degrees  of  quantity  may  be  thus  distin- 
guished by  the  symbols ;  as  : 

1.  Abrupt  or  extra-short  (ah),     J< 

2.  Ordinary  short,  .         .          .      J 

3.  Ordinary  long,   .          .  J  { 

4.  Extra-long,         .  -Ill 

LINKED    SYMBOLS. 

Some  peculiar  oral  combinations  are  occasionally  met  with  among  indi- 
vidual speakers,  such  as  pronouncing  R  with  a  labial  quality  added  to  the 
ordinary  lingual  formation  ;  or  uniting  a  '  Point '  and  a  '  Back  '  friction  for  the 
same  element ;  modifying  S  with  rounded  lips,  or  with  the  lower  lip  in  the 
position  or  F,  &c.  All  such  peculiarities  may  be  indicated  at  pleasure  by 
writing  two  organic  symbols  with  a  '  link '  (o)  between  them,  to  show  that  they 
are  to  be  pronounced  simultaneously  and  not  in  succession.  Thus  :  QoQ, 
labialized  r  ;  QoQ,  gutturalized  r\  QoQ,  s  modified  by/;  &c. 

Any  two  elements — vowels,  consonants,  or  one  of  each  class — may  be  thus 
'  linked,'  where  a  single  alphabetic  symbol  does  not  express  the  whole  mechanism 
of  a  peculiar  sound.  Thus  the  '  Low-Back  '  vowel  '  linked  '  to  the  '  Lip  '-Con- 
sonant (JoQ)  would  show  close  labial  modification  of  a  sound  which,  when 
normally  '  rounded,'  is  associated  with  a  broad  aperture  of  the  lips,  &c. 

GOVERNING  SIGNS. 

A  pair  of  'linked'  symbols  within  parenthesis  (QoQ)  (QoQ),  &c.,  may 
be  used  as  Governing  signs  to  denote  habitual  peculiarities  of  any  kind,  and  to 
save  the  writing  of  the  latter  at  every  instance  of  their  recurrence.  Thus  the 
'  Nasal '  sign,  or  the  '  Back '  or  the  '  Lip  '  consonant,  '  linked  '  to  any  element, 
will  show  a  general  nasalizing,  gutturalizing,  or  labializing  of  that  particular 
sound  ;  as  (G0°(0  ?  nasal  ;  (QO°C)  Z  guttural,  &c. 


81 


A  more  general  indication  of  such  peculiarities,  without  reference  to  any 
specific  element,  will  be  furnished  by  writing  the  '  link '  before  the  '  nasal '  or 
other  organic  sign  by  itself,  within  parenthesis  ;  as  (oQY:)  close  lips ;  (oQa:) 
protruded  tongue  ;  (o( :)  general  nasal  quality  ;  (oj^:)  strained  voice,  &c. 

Habits  of  lisping,  burring,  &c.  ;  peculiar  elementary  substitutions ;  huski- 
ness,  drawling,  abruptness,  hemming,  monotony  or  prevailing  tone  ;  audible 
inhaling,  '  windy  suspiration  of  forced  breath,'  closing  the  teeth,  jerking  the 
emphasis,  licking  or  biting  the  lips,  speaking  from  one  side  of  the  mouth,  &c., 
may  thus  be  simply  conveyed  to  the  eye. 

This  species  of  fac-simile  writing  may  be  found  useful  for  directive  pur- 
poses, to  composers  of  vocal  music,  dramatic  authors  and  actors,  teachers  of 
oratory  or  of  singing,  &c.  ;  as  well  as  amusingly  applicable,  on  special  occasions, 
by  too  faithful  '  reporters,'  in  presenting  a  typic  phonogram  of  the  idiosyncrasies 
of  speakers. 

Subjoined  are  a  few  examples  of  '  linked  '  symbols  :— 


(Ci)°GO  r>  guttural. 
(Q°30  r,  labial. 
(D°  30  wh,  as  w. 
O°30  w,  as  v. 
(QoM  s,  as  th. 
(Q°LS:)  s,  as  sh. 
(£3°Q:)  *h,  as  s. 
(QCOoUGO:)  cl,  as  tl. 
(QoQ:  &c.)   obstructed 

nasals. 

(G°GQO  ng,  as  ngg. 
(O°IO  h  omitted. 
(I°O:)  vowels  aspirated. 
(V°Ci):)  r-glide,  as  r-con- 

sonant. 

(Cfto[:)  Scotch  a. 
(Cfi°W  Cockney  a. 
(Ho}:)  Scotch  o. 


(H°1IO  Cockney  o. 
(Cy°COO  Scotch  a  before  r. 
(}y°}0  0  Scotch  o  before  r. 
(iy°iyO  American  e  or  i 

before  r. 

(Ol°f  10  American  11. 
(31°CliO   American  ow 

in  nozv. 
(o}"{:)  Inner  rounding  of 

oo,  [without  the  lips.] 
(oQ$:)  r  trilled. 
(oQ:)  whisper. 
(oQ:)  husky  voice. 
(°IAO  strained  voice. 
(°IYO  soft  voice. 
(°I|  10  drawling, 
(ojt :)  abrupt  vowels. 
(oTi:)  vocal  tremor. 


(o<  :)  audible  inspirations. 

(o>  :)  transitional  aspira- 
tions. 

(opj:)transitional  murmurs 
[hemming  and  hawing.] 

(o^:)  keeping  the  mouth 
close. 

(<>Y:)  keeping  the  mouth 
open. 

(°XI:)  coughing  the  vowels. 

(oX:)  choking  utterance. 

(o>  :)  hesitancy. 

(oQ-  :  &c.)  '  stopping  '  con- 
sonants [stammering.] 

(oQ>Q:  &c.)  repeating  con- 
sonants [stuttering.] 

(o1:)  marked  accentuation 
[rhythm.] 


82 

ANALYSIS  OF  'MIXED'  SYMBOLS,  AND  OPTIONAL  EXTENSION 

OF   THE    PRINCIPLE. 

The  '  Mixed '  Vowel  and  Consonant  Symbols  provided  in  the  alphabet 
may  be  considered  as  equivalent  to  '  linked '  letters,  which  are,  for  typographic 
convenience,  combined  in  one  character.  Thus  the  vowel  I  might  be  written 
1°I  ;  I  might  be  written  ]o[  ;  X  might  be  written  JoJ  ;  to  express  the  same 
sounds. 

So,  too,  the  consonant  (^  might  be  written  C°O  \  Q  might  be  written 
O°O  ;  L3  might  be  written  O°O  5  £)  might  be  written  QoC  5  but  in  the 
case  of  the  consonants  the  '  mixed '  symbols  express  more  than  combination, 
as  they  are  designed  to  show  excess  of  one  over  the  other  element  in  the  organic 
compound. 

On  the  same  principle,  other  alphabetic  forms  may  be  introduced  to  show 
the  combinations  C°O,  C°O,  O°G>  O°O,  &c.,  with  excess  of  either  element, 
should  it  be  found  desirable  for  local  convenience  anywhere,  to  express  such 
organic  compounds  by  single  types.  The  principle  of  the  system  admits  of  an 
extension  of  the  alphabetic  characters  without  danger  of  ambiguity ;  as  each 
radical  symbol  retains  its  organic  value  with  uniformity  in  all  cases. 

The  sign  of  '  trill,'  or  of  '  inner '  or  '  outer '  formation,  of  '  stop  '  or  '  holder,' 
or  of  '  nasal '  or  '  naso-guttural '  modification,  may  be  similarly  combined,  by 
superposition  or  otherwise,  ad  libitum,  with  the  letters  to  which  they  refer, 
wherever  convenience  could  be  served  by  the  incorporation  of  the  symbols  into 
single  types. 

TONES. 

The  most  important  affection  of  simple  voice  is  modulation,  or  change  of 
pitch.  The  qualities  of  tone  are  most  clearly  felt  in  connection  with  inarticulate 
sound.-  But  even  articulate  speech  is  interpreted  by  tone  ;  and  in  all  cases 
where  sentiment  rather  than  the  communication  of  ideas  is  concerned,  the 
modulations  which  accompany  utterance  are  more  expressive  than  words.  In 
the  Chinese  language,  the  same  combinations  of  articulate  elements  pronounced 
with  different  tones,  are  said  to  express  an  equal  number  of  distinct  meanings. 
Hence  the  necessity  of  including  modulative  signs  in  a  scheme  of  speech- 
symbols  adapted  for  universal  application. 


83 

Chinese  linguists,  however,  use  the  word  '  tone '  in  a  peculiar  sense.  They 
include  under  that  name  effects  which  are  not  properly  varieties  of  intonation. 
Thus,  the  sudden  check  given  to  a  vowel  by  the  closing  of  the  glottis  is  reckoned 
a  '  tone.'  In  Visible  Speech  this  effect  is  represented  by  the  symbol  for  '  stop'  (•), 
or  for  '  catch'  (X). 

The  degrees  of  modulation  are  almost  infinitely  numerous,  and  they  are 
perhaps  incapable  of  exact  symbolization ;  but  there  are  radical  varieties  of 
inflexion,  each  of  which  conveys  a  distinct  significance,  and  to  some  one  of 
which  all  minor  modifications  must  be  generically  related.  These  radical 
inflexions  may  be  usefully  symbolized.  Thus  : 

Symbol. 

Level  tone. 

/  Simple  rising  inflexion. 

\          Simple  falling  inflexion. 
v          Compound  rising  inflexion  : — falling  and  rising  with  a  single  impulse 

of  voice. 
A          Compound  falling  inflexion  : — rising  and  falling  with  a  single  impulse 

of  voice. 

The  effect  of  a  monotone  is  reflective ;  the  effect  of  a  rising  tone  is  prospec- 
tive ;  and  of  a  falling  tone  retrospective.  Thus  a  vocal  murmur  with  monotone 
(I-)  expresses  attention  or  observation;  and  a  prolonged  monotone  (I|-) 
musing.  A  simple  rising  inflexion,  of  limited  range,  expresses  enquiry  or 
doubt  (I')  ;  and  a  prolonged  one,  self-interrogation  or  prospective  musing  (If)- 
A  simple  falling  inflexion,  of  moderate  interval,  expresses  assertion  or  assur- 
ance (P)  ;  and  a  prolonged  one,  self-assurance  or  retrospective  musing  (IP). 
When  rising  or  falling  inflexions  are  modified  to  intervals  of  pitch  corresponding 
to  those  of  the  '  minor  mode '  in  music,  the  effect  is  plaintive :  a  simple  rise  ex- 
presses compassion  or  supplication  ;  and  a  simple  fall,  regret  or  lamentation. 
When  the  rising  or  falling  tone  extends  through  greater  intervals — of  a  fifth,  an 
octave,  or  more — the  rise  expresses  surprise  or  incredulity ;  and  the  fall,  injunc- 
tion or  dogmatism. 

The  effect  of  the  compound  tones — which  combine  a  fall  and  a  rise,  or  a  rise 
and  a  fall,  with  one  accentual  impulse — is  to  suggest  the  expressiveness  of  their 
first  element  in  antithesis  to  that  of  their  second  element.  Thus  a  compound 
rising  tone  is  appellatory  or  prospective  by  its  termination,  and  affirmative  by 


84 

its  commencement :  it  suggests  affirmatively  that  an  effect  or  consequence  will 
follow  the  utterance.  This  tone  (JV)  thus  expresses  warning  or  discontent, 
when  of  moderate  range  ;  regretful  supplication  or  unwilling  detraction,  when  in 
the  '  minor  mode  ;'  threatening  or  contemptuous  appeal,  when  of  extended 
range  ;  and  musing  or  reflection  on  contingent  probabilities,  when  prolonged 
(I|v).  A  compound  falling  tone  is  affirmative  or  retrospective  by  its  termina- 
.tion,  and  appellatory  by  its  commencement :  it  suggests  interrogatively  that 
enquiry,  cause,  or  motive  has  preceded  the  utterance.  This  tone  (I*)  thus 
expresses  counter-assertion,  or  impugning,  when  of  moderate  range  ;  compas- 
sionate affirmation  or  derisive  commendation,  when  of  'minor'  interval;  dog- 
matic counter-assertion,  or  sarcasm,  when  of  extended  range  ;  and  reflection  on 
consistent  certainties  when  prolonged  (IU). 

Illustrations  in  connection  with  words  may  help  the  reader  to  produce  these 
varieties  of  expressive  inflexion.     Thus  : 

I.  Pronounce  the  word  '  /' '  with  simple  rising  tone,  and  the  utterance  will  be 

felt  to  be  as  plainly  interrogative  as  the  equivalent  sentential  expression 
1  Is  it  I?' 

II.  Pronounce  the  word  '  You"'  with  simple  falling  tone,  and  the  utterance  will 

be  felt  to  be  as  plainly  assertive  as  the  equivalent  sentence,  '  //  was yoti  /' 

III.  Pronounce  the  word  'go  ^'  with  compound  rising  tone,  and  the  utterance 

will  be  felt  to  be  equivalent  to  '  go — or  an  understood  consequence  will 
follow!'  Or  pronounce  the  sentence  '/"would  not,'  and  the  tone  will 
be  felt  to  suggest  the  positive  inference — '  but  another  might.' 
IV.  Pronounce  the  word  'go  '"'  with  compound  falling  tone,  and  the  utterance 
will  be  felt  to  be  equivalent  to  '  go — because  an  understood  motive  or 
reason  urges  !'  Or,  pronounce  the  sentence  '  Yon  '^  did  it  /'  and  the  tone 
will  be  felt  to  suggest  the  negative  or  appellatory  inference — '  and  not 
another  person.' 

The  preceding  analysis  of  Tones  shows  that  the  effects  of  intonation  are 
not  less  various  in  our  own  language  than  they  can  be  in  Chinese  or  in  any 
tongue.  Modulative  expressiveness  is,  in  fact,  the  same  in  all  countries :  it  is 
not,  like  articulate  utterance,  arbitrary  and  conventional,  but  instinctive  and 
natural. 

This  statement  may  be  thought  to  be  at  variance  with  the  fact,  that  in  every 
dialect,  and  almost  in  every  family,  there  is  a  prevailing  modulative  tune ;  but 


85 

this  habitual  succession  of  tones  is  associated  only  with  articulate  language, 
which  is  altogether  habitual,  artificial,  and  local.  In  the  use  of  inarticulate 
modulations,  there  is,  no  doubt,  a  universal  agreement. 

It  is  further  to  be  noticed,  that  the  prevailing  tones  of  dialects,  families,  or 
individuals,  reveal  the  prominent  points  of  individual  or  national  character.  Thus 
a  wide  variety  of  pitch  and  inflexion  in  speech  denotes  vivacity  and  levity  of 
disposition  ;  and  a  general  sameness  of  pitch,  or  a  limited  range  of  inflexions,- 
denotes  comparative  dulness  and  gravity.  A  predominance  of  simple  rising 
tones  characterizes  timid,  retiring,  dependent,  inconfident,  querulous,  scrupulous 
conciliatory  people ;  a  predominance  of  simple  falling  tones  characterizes  bold, 
rash,  independent,  persevering,  confident,  dominating,  stern,  uncompromising 
people ;  a  predominance  of  compound  rising  tones  characterizes  vain,  forward, 
self-aggrandizing,  shrewd,  calculating,  clever,  insinuating,  wily  people;  and  a 
predominance  of  compound  falling  tones  characterizes  proud,  self-confident, 
supercilious,  sarcastic,  revengeful  people.  As  a  general  rule,  simple  tones  indi- 
cate artlessness,  and  compound  tones  artfulness  of  character. 

An  accomplished  speaker,  in  any  country,  cannot  express  himself  with 
habitual  modulative  tune  of  any  kind.  His  voice  will  be  constantly  varied  in 
pitch,  inflexion,  and  range,  in  accordance  with  his  feeling  of  the  inherent  expres- 
siveness of  the  tones.  The  association  of  this  vocal  vis  naturce  with  the  utter- 
ance of  conventional  language,  constitutes  the  great  difficulty  in  acquiring,  and 
the  great  charm  in  listening  to,  the  delivery  of  an  effective  reader,  orator,  or 
tragedian. 

In  our  notation  of  Tones,  no  more  is  aimed  at  than  the  discrimination  of 
the  radical  varieties  : — level,  and  simple  or  compound  rise  or  fall.  The  types  for 
tones — being,  however,  like  all  the  'Visible  Speech'  types,  reversible — may  be 
used  to  indicate  relative /z'Ar^  as  well  as  inflexion.  Thus  : 

J'  high-pitched  rise,  (expressing  simple  enquiry). 

J/  low-pitched  rise,  (expressing  interrogative  surprise). 

1\  low-pitched  fall,  (expressing  simple  assertion). 

]"  high-pitched  fall,  (expressing  dogmatic  assertion). 

One  additional  symbol  for  modulation,  or  change  of  KEY,  furnishes  all  that 
it  can  be  desirable  to  indicate  in  connection  with  Tones  in  the  writing  of  languages. 

Thus  : 

r     Key  elevated.  ,     Key  depressed. 


sc 

MODULATED  WHISPER. 

An  observant  car  will  detect  the  quality  of  modulation  or  change  of  pitch 
even  in  a  simple  breathing.  A  sigh  may  thus  be  modulated.  The  rising  modu- 
lation of  a  sigh  conveys  a  sentiment  of  anticipation  ;  the  falling,  a  sentiment  of 
remembrance.  The  difference  is  due  to  a  change  in  the  size  of  the  oral  cavity, 
and  consequently  a  change  in  the  vowel  quality  of  the  breath. 

Every  configuration  of  the  mouth  gives  the  breath  an  absolute  pitch,  so 
that  it  will  be  found  impossible  to  whisper  any  one  vowel  with  changes  of  modu- 
lation. There  is  no  difficulty  in  changing  the  pitch  of  the  breath  ;  but  with  every 
change,  the  vowel  quality  —  the  oral  configuration  —  is  altered.  As  the  tongue 
increases  in  convexity,  the  cavity  of  the  mouth  is  lessened,  and  the  pitch  rises  • 
and  as  the  aperture  of  the  lips  is  narrowed,  the  pitch  falls.  The  lowest  sound  is 
consequently  that  which  has  the  root  of  the  tongue  most  depressed  and  the  lips 
in  the  closest  position. 

Each  of  the  consonant  sibilations,  as  well  as  the  vowels,  will  thus  be  found 
to  have  an  inherent  pitch  ;  but  the  pitch  of  the  consonants  may  be  considerably 
varied  by  'inner'  or  'outer'  shifts  of  the  configurative  aperture,  and  by  altera- 
tions in  the  oral  cavity,  which  do  not  destroy  the  essential  character  of  the 
sibilation.  The  following  is  the  modulative  order  of  the  primary  consonants  :  — 

0     \ 

D  G  C!  C  CM  O  W  Q0<  O  (U 

In  forming  the  first  of  these  elements,  the  tongue  is  in  the  '  high-back  ' 
position.  A  deeper  series  of  sounds  can  consequently  be  formed  by  depressing 
the  back  of  the  tongue  while  the  lips  retain  the  close  position  of  £).  Thus  the 
following  form  a  lower  descending  series  : 

(oQ:)  [the  sign  of  whisper  :]  loO(=£))  ]oQ  JoQ. 

The  '  divided  '  formations  are  lower  in  pitch  than  the  '  primary  '  or  centre- 
aperture  elements  of  the  same  organic  mechanism.  The  following  is  the  modu- 
lative order  of  the  '  divided  '  consonants  : 


The  vowels  allied  to  the  centre-aperture  consonants  yield  whispers  of 
slightly  lower  pitch  than  that  of  the  consonants,  because  of  the  greater  expan- 
sion of  the  breath-channel.  For  the  same  reason,  the  '  wide  '  vowels  of  the 


87 

'  front '  and  the  '  mixed  '  series  are  a  degree  lower  than  the  '  primary  '  vowels  ; 
but  the  '  primary '  vowels  of  the  '  back '  series  are  a  degree  lower  in  pitch  than 
the  '  wride '  vowels,  because  the  greater  retraction  of  the  tongue  enlarges  the 
oral  cavity.  The  following  is  the  modulative  order  of  the  Lingual  vowels  : 


^^^Jiil^J?         21 

n   n   n   n   n   T  T   n    n   n. 

The  '  rounded '  vowels  are  lower  in  pitch  than  their  corresponding  simple 
'  linguals.'  The  pitch  of  the  highest  of  the  '  rounded '  vowels  is  the  same  as 
that  of  the  '  high-mixed '  of  the  lingual  series ;  and  the  pitch  of  the  '  low- 
back  '  vowel  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  '  low-mixed '  of  the  '  rounded '  series. 
The  unisons  in  the  scales  explain  the  similarity  in  effect  of  guttural  and  of 
labial  modification  before  referred  to.  [See  page  76].  Thus  in  forming  Q,  the 
tongue  is  in  the  neutral  or  '  natural '  position,  and  the  breath  is  affected  to  the 
same  pitch  either  by  contracting  the  passage  between  the  back  of  the  tongue 
and  the  soft  palate  (Cl)>  or  by  narrowing  the  labial  aperture.  The  correspon- 
dence may  be  thus  represented  : 

Guttural.  Neutral.  Labial. 

The  modulative  order  of  the  vowels  and  the  primary  consonants,  united 
into  one  scale  is  the  following : 

0    t 

DGOCMCClJOWn         Oi      O      0\ 

n  }  ^  j  j  u  i  *  i  i  i  t  t  «  t  f  ij 

Whatever  practical  use  may  be  made  of  this  scale,  the  relations  it  exhibits 
as  inherent  in  the  elementary  configurations  may  be  found  of  some  service  in 
securing  uniformity  of  pronunciation  of  the  symbols  in  different  countries. 
Thus  to  find  the  precise  quality  of  the  vowel  represented  by  1  prolong  the  con- 
sonant Ci>  the-ri  vowelize  or  expand  and  tensify  the  configuration  to  remove  the 
friction  of  the  breath  ;  and,  keeping  the  organs  in  the  same  position,  sound  the 


88 

voice,  and  the  result  will  be  the  vowel  ].  Or  whisper  the  vowel  £  (oo),  and  entirely 
spread  the  lips  without  moving  the  tongue,  and  the  result  will  be  \,  or,  with 
sibilation,  C^-  [See  page  75]. 

The  best  way  to  perform  such  experiments  on  configurative  pitch,  will  be 
to  listen  to  the  different  elements  as  whispered  by  another  person  who  does  ;not 
know  the  purpose  for  which  he  produces  the  effects  :  otherwise  the  subtle 
power  of  variation  before  referred  to — although  all  variations  are  absolutely 
dependent  on  changes  in  the  cavity  of  the  mouth — will  perplex  the  ear  in  its 
attempts  to  catch  the  natural  pitch  of  a  configuration.  Wide  differences  will 
be  best  appreciated  at  first.  These  may  be  used  to  test  the  principle.  No 
person,  for  example,  will  be  found  to  whisper  the  words  way  or  we  with  a  descent 
of  pitch  from  w  to  the  vowel  ;  or  the  words  yoke  or  you  with  an  ascent  of  pitch 
from  y  to  the  vowrel  ;  but,  on  the  contrary,  every  person  will  be  found  to  whisper 
any  given  series  of  elements  with  exactly  the  same  relations  of  pitch,  when  no 
special  effort  is  made  to  accommodate  the  result  to  a  pre-conceived  note. 

WHISTLING  is  another  form  of  modulated  whisper.  The  varieties  of  pitch 
in  whistling  are  produced  by  changes  in  the  cavity  of  the  mouth,  of  the  same 
kind  as  those  which  produce  varieties  of  vowel-sound.  A  whistle  has  a  well- 
understood — if  a  vulgar — expressiveness,  and  it  may  not  be  superfluous  to  provide 
a  sign  for  this  effect  (<=>).  A  whistle  with  rising  modulation  is  a  call  of  invitation  ; 
with  falling  modulation  it  is  a  call  of  imperativeness. 

A  whistle  formed  on  the  tongue—  bearing  the  same  relation  to  £J  that  the 
labial  whistle  bears  to  £)  —  may  be  symbolized  by  adding  the  sign  of  'inner' 
formation  (<=>\).  This  sound  adds  an  intimation  of  secresy  to  the  meanings 
conveyed  by  the  labial  whistle. 

A  whistle  formed  on  the  tongue  and  modified  by  the  lips — symbolized  by 
<=>JoQ — gives  a  loud  and  piercing  signal  of  alarm. 

Whistle  and  voice  may  be  blended.  The  symbol  of  the  combination 
would  be  <x>. 


\ 


PRACTICAL    APPLICATION     OF 

VISIBLE     SPEECH 
TO     LANGUAGES. 


91 

THE  ELEMENTARY  SOUNDS  OF  LANGUAGES. 

The  scheme  of  Letters  developed  in  the  preceding  pages  provides  the 
means  of  alphabetically  representing  all  languages  exactly  as  they  are  spoken, 
or  according  to  any  standard  of  pronunciation. 

The  symbols  have  been  explained  with  reference  only  to  the  organic 
adjustments  which  they  represent,  and  not  in  connection  with  the  elementary 
sounds  of  languages  ;  because  the  sound  intended  necessarily  results,  in  every 
case,  from  putting  the  organs  in  the  symbolized  position. 

The  sounds  of  many  of  the  symbols  cannot  be  exemplified  by  ordinary 
letters,  or  even  by  key-words,  which  are  so  differently  pronounced  by  different 
speakers  ;  but  the  relations  of  the  various  elements  will  be  perfectly  apprehended 
from  an  attentive  study  of  the  Symbols  themselves  and  the  explanatory  Dia- 
grams. The  effect  will  be  found  to  be,  that  when  the  symbols  of  familiar 
sounds  are  known,  the  sounds  of  other  letters  will  be  deduced  from  the  forms 
of  the  letters  more  accurately  than  they  could  be  from  key-words.  [See  '  Mode 
of  deducing  Foreign  Sounds  from  their  Symbols.'] 

The  elementary  sounds  in  actual  use  in  any  language  may  be  most  con- 
veniently ascertained  by  tabulation  from  the  utterance  of  selected  speakers  ; 
and  a  standard  of  the  pronunciation  of  every  tongue  may  thus  be  fixed  for  the 
guidance  equally  of  native  and  of  foreign  learners. 

Languages  also  which  have  never  been  reduced  to  writing  may  now  be 
alphabetized  by  missionaries  and  travellers  with  such  uniformity  as — whatever 
the  nationality  of  the  writers  —to  convey  a  faithful  copy  of  the  native  pronuncia- 
tion which  readers  in  all  countries  will  vocalize  alike. 

It  has  never  hitherto  been  possible  to  write  a  language  or  dialect  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  enable  a  stranger  to  the  language  and  to  the  writer's  native  tongue 
to  read  the  transcript  with  even  an  approach  to  vernacular  accuracy.  This  old 
'  impossibility'  may  now  be  accomplished  simply,  certainly,  and  universally. 

The  scales  of  sounds  may  be  taught  without  the  use  of  language  as  a 
medium  of  instruction,  and  by  means  only  of  diagrams  and  oral  exemplifications 
of  the  elementary  sounds.  Thus  it  will  be  possible  for  a  missionary  or  a 
traveller,  who  is  acquainted  with  '  Visible  Speech,'  to  write  an  unknown  language 
as  he  hears  it,  and  to  teach  its  unlettered  speakers  to  read  their  own  tongue, 
before  their  instructor  himself  has  learned  the  meaning  of  a  word. 

The  difference  between  many  of  the  elementary  sounds,  when  separately 

pronounced,  may  appear  to  unaccustomed  cars  too  slight  to  be  of  importance  ; 

M 


but  to  those  who  use  the  sounds  in  vernacular  speech,  the  slightest  differences 
are  often  real  distinctions  on  which  intelligibility  depends.  Each  of  the  oral 
configurations,  when  definitely  formed,  yields  a  perfectly  distinct  quality  of 
sound,  and  the  nicest  varieties  will  become  appreciable  when  the  configurative 
differences  are  clearly  apprehended. 

A  good  '  ear '  and  considerable  practice  will  be  necessary  to  enable  a 
person  to  analyze  new  combinations,  and  to  identify  foreign  sounds,  at  hearing  ; 
but  a  good  ear  is  in  great  measure  a  product  of  education,  and  the  power  of 
discrimination  will  become  sufficiently  common  when  it  is  drawn  out  by  exercise. 
Ordinary  learners  of  '  Visible  Speech '  do  not  require  any  special  aptitude. 
Facility  in  reading  will  be  attained  by  any  person  in  a  very  brief  period. 

Some  of  the  shades  of  sound  distinguished  to  the  eye  will,  no  doubt,  at 
first,  be  difficult  of  appreciation  by  readers  unaccustomed  to  exact  observation. 
The  beginner  should  therefore  content  himself  with  associating  with  their  respec- 
tive symbols  such  sounds  only  as  he  habitually  uses  and  can  readily  discriminate. 
The  power  of  minuter  discernment  will  infallibly  increase  after  the  eye  and  the 
mouth  have  become  familiar  with  a  few  of  these  settled  landmarks  of  sound. 

There  is  often,  however,  a  difficulty  felt  in  recognizing  familiar  sounds  when 
they  are  heard  under  unusual  circumstances — long  instead  of  short,  accented 
instead  of  unaccented,  and  vice  versa.  The  reader  must  lose  sight  of  such  habitual 
associations  of  accent  and  quantity,  and  bear  in  mind  that  these  accidents  are 
not  inherent  in  any  sound.  The  vowels,  for  instance,  in  ill,  dl,  at,  up,  on,  &c., 
may  be  prolonged  as  much  as  those  in  eel,  all,  ooze,  &c.,  and  the  latter  may  be 
shortened  to  any  extent,  without  affecting  their  essential  quality.  So,  too,  the 
'  obscure '  unaccented  vowels  in  places,  certain,  sofa,  mentzVw,  picture,  &c.,  may 
have  the  fulness  and  definiteness  of  accent ;  and  considerable  practice  is  neces- 
sary to  enable  the  ear  to  identify  the  sounds  under  the  altered  conditions.  All 
collated  alphabets — that  is  those  which  are  formed  by  an  aggregation  of  the 
elementary  sounds  discerned  in  different  languages,  like  the  '  Standard  Alpha- 
bet '  of  Lepsius,  Mr  Ellis's  '  Palaeotype,'  &c. — contain  repeated  entries  of  the 
same  sounds,  under  differences  only  of  accent,  quantity,  coalescence  with  ad- 
joining elements,  &c.  In  '  Visible  Speech,'  these  elements  would,  of  course, 
have  the  same  graphic  sign. 

Examples  of  the  letter-value  of  the  principal  '  speech-symbols ' — taken, 
when  possible,  from  English  and  its  "dialects — are  furnished  in  the  following 
Tables,  which  will  serve  to  establish  a  sufficient  number  of  phonetic  'landmarks' 
in  the  reader's  mind  : — 


JETTER-VALUE  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL   CONSONANT  AND  GLIDE  SYMBOLS. 

CONSONANTS. 

Am.  American         F.  French  Hu.  Hungarian         Pec.  peculiar          Sp.  Spanish 

Cock.  Cockney         Ga.  Gaelic  Ir.  Irish.  Po.  Polish  W.  Welsh 

E.  English  Ge.  German          It.  Italian  Sc.  Scotch  Z.  Zulu. 


o 

fe             (E.) 

0 

(Vowel  whisp.) 

e 

variety  of  de- 
fective r 

X 

bu'er  for  "butter 
(west  of  Scot.) 

c 

nac/i        (Ge.) 
ttch         (Sc.) 

C 

au^         (Ge.) 
sou^/j        (Sc.) 

C 

hiss  of  water- 
fowl. 

K 

a 

c,  k,  q,          (E.) 
aj  kind    (E.) 

Q 

sink*         (E.) 

0 

\ch           (Ge.) 

Q 

j,  r,             (E.) 
QJciudad(Sp) 

O 
variety  of  de- 
fective s 

^2 
//«n            (E.) 

QL 
variety  of  t 

Q 

variety  of  «* 

O 

theatre      (F.) 
-rh           (W.) 

£3 
.svfow          (E.) 
^aud         (F.) 

O 
temple       (F.) 
felt*           (E.) 

£J 
/?              (W.) 
hi               (Z.) 

0 

tie              (E.) 

O 

tent*         (E.) 

O 

variety  of  f 
or  wh 

D 

w/^y            (E.) 

3 

/ie              (E.) 

0 

gutturalized 
variety  of  f 

D 

/ie              (E.) 

O 

lamp*       (E.) 
m//m  !      (Sc.) 

e 

tage         (Ge.) 
G}  zei/7e(Ge.) 
£  \  burred  r 

£ 

varty-of£-(Ge.) 
and  of  defec- 
tive r       (E.) 

8 

Zaogh       (Ga.) 
barred  1   (Po.) 

e 

labialized 
variety  of 
Gaelic  I 

G 

£•0              (E.) 
eU^uide  (E.) 

G 

sing          (E.) 

O 

jes            (E.) 

& 

.seal            (E.) 

&\d,  final  (Sp.) 

CO 

7/ano         (Sp.) 
gli                (It.) 

SQ 
///en            (E.) 

Q 
Magyar  (Hu.) 

Q 

Boulogne  (F.) 

0 

race          (E.) 
Q$  r(Sc.  Sp. 
&c.) 

03 

pleasure     (E.) 
your            (F.) 

00 

/ie               (E.) 

03 
«%Z             (Z.) 

Q 

^ie             (E.) 

05 

s'm             (E.) 

3 

weg        (Ge.) 
*>            (Sp.) 

3 

way           (E.) 

3 

7/ie             (E.) 

e 

gutturalized 
variety  of  v 

3 

£uy             (E.) 

B 

seew         (E.) 

*  The  nasals,  and  also  1,  before  non-vocal  consonants,  are  often  pronounced  without  vocality.     The  exact  effect  of  the  English 
compounds  in  felt,  ink,  tent,  lamp,  &c.,  includes  both  the  vocal  and  the  voiceless  I,  m,  n,  &c.     Thus  : — 


OtGXOO,  IGQC1,  OltfGa  COIBOD- 

The  voiceless  elements,  howerer,  do  not  require  to  be  written  in  such  words.    [See  '  Imperfect  and  Variable  Vocality  of  Consonants.'] 


94 
GLIDES. 


> 

I 

I 

5 

I 

? 

ft 

* 

V 

¥ 

2 

p'aper 

va'ry 

now 

are 

are 

our 

di*  (E.) 

new 

are(E.) 

our(E) 

liii  (F.) 

noz 

(Ir.) 

(E.) 

(Am.  &  Cock.) 

(pec.) 

(smooth 
burr) 

(s.  burr 
labialized) 

dar(E) 

(North  Ir.) 

LETTER-VALUE  OF  THE   PRINCIPAL  VOWEL  SYMBOLS. 


1 

I 

I 

1 

I 

I 

laogh  (Ga.) 

first    (Am.) 

/I            (F.)  j 
l\ee\      (E.) 
I  ft  iille  (F.) 

5S}w 

-shire     (E.) 
-rs  (pi.)  (E.) 

zll         (E.) 

3 

I 

c 

3 

1 

C 

up        (E.) 

que         (F.) 
1ft  zeit  (Ge.) 
If  un     (F.) 

<?t            (F.) 
tfday(Sc) 

[ft  d^y   (E.) 

«sk         (E.) 
m#nn   (Ge.) 
3Rl«gh(E.) 

31h^  (E.) 

a  [article]  (E.) 

-al       )    ,_  . 
i   [•*-•'•) 

\jf\  QCtV  (Cock.J 

ill        (Sc.) 
-m^nt^  /,-,  v 
-nrss  /^    '' 
C^rt/r   (E.) 

J 

I 

I 

J 

I 

I 

up       (Sc.) 

sz'r     (Prov.) 

*11          (E.) 
11*11    (Sc.) 
If  v««    (F.) 

m#n      (Sc.) 
J|ps«lm(E) 
TV  are     (E  ) 

J    A                           \          '/ 

XV  err     (E.) 
up     (Cock.) 

m/?n       /F  \ 

1  1  1  Li,  1  1             1  J^  j  .  1 

1  1  pap«  (Ir.) 
II  eye  (Sc.) 

II  n<9W  (Cock.) 

T  xll^?//S(  CjG  ) 

1^  our(0ock.) 

1 

I 

f 

1 

I 

f 

book     (Sc. 
11  P">1  (E.) 
01{u(E.) 

u         (Sw.) 

«ber[|](Ge) 

t^,  good  (E.) 
1¥  P^r  (E.) 

-«re       (E.) 
12  do  (Am.) 

b^t   (noun) 
(Sc.) 

} 

t 

{ 

J 

\ 

i, 

h0me[|](Sc) 

h0mme  (F.) 
*?  0«      (F.) 

«ne        (F,) 

-^?/gh     (E.) 
ch^ad     (F.) 
}¥  ore    (E.) 

stone  (Am.) 
n<?te      (Sc.) 

]eu          (F.) 
boot  (v.  imp 
behooved) 
(Sc.) 

J 

I 

t 

J 

I 

t 

all[{]  (E.) 
J¥war(E.) 

sir         (Ir.) 
1ft  /       (Ir.) 
I?  «*      (F.) 

beurre  [j] 

£?n           (E.) 
iJYor       (E.) 
Jft  b^y/    (E.) 

«sk  (Cock.) 
not         (Ir.) 

/'ii     (Sc.) 

f  I  OM<  (Cock.) 

*  Syllables  preceded  by  a  hyphen  are  unaccented  terminations. 


95 


MODES   OF   TEACHING   THE   UNIVERSAL   ALPHABET. 

Teachers  should,  of  course,  be  perfectly  familiar  with  the  Theory  of  the 
Alphabet,  as  well  as  competent  to  exemplify  all  the  elementary  sounds,  and  to 
recognise  them  with  certainty  when  heard.  Learners  may  be  introduced  at  once 
to  the  symbols. 

The  teaching  of  the  symbols  for  vernacular  sounds  can  in  no  case  be 
attended  with  difficulty  ;  and  illiterate  learners  may  begin  to  read  with  their 
first  lesson.  A  plan  of  .instruction  applicable  to  children  and  illiterate  adults  is 
shown  in  a  subsequent  section. 

For  other  learners  a  different  method  will  be  preferable.  The  names  of  the 
letters  should  first  be  taught,  independently  of  sounds.  When  the  names  of  all 
the  vowels  and  consonants  are  known — which,  with  oral  teaching,  will  be  in  a 
few  minutes — the  symbols  of  familiar  sounds  should  be  pointed  out,  and  the 
learner  should  repeat  the  pronunciation  of  these  until  he  becomes  conscious  of 
the  organic  actions  by  which  he  forms  the  sounds  ;  and  of  the  correspondence 
of  the  actions  with  those  which  he  specifies  in  naming  the  letters.  The  relations 
of  the  symbols  will,  in  this  way,  be  speedily  felt,  and  the  plan  of  the  Alphabet 
will  be  fully  comprehended  long  before  the  whole  of  the  sounds  which  the 
learner  habitually  makes  have  been  associated  with  their  symbols. 

The  pronunciation  of  foreign  sounds  will  not,  of  course,  be  so  easy  as  the 
discrimination  of  their  letters ;  but  after  the  principle  of  symbolization  has 
been  comprehended  in  connection  with  native  sounds,  the  '  visible '  relations  of 
foreign  to  native  sounds  will  be  of  the  greatest  possible  assistance  to  the  learner 
in  forming  his  mouth  for  unfamiliar  elements.  In  most  cases  it  will  be  found 
that  unknown  sounds  will  reveal  themselves  with  a  fair  approximation  to 
accuracy  at  the  first  effort,  by  means  of  their  relation  to  sounds  which  are 
known.  [See  '  Mode  of  Deducing  Foreign  Sounds  from  their  Symbols.'] 

A  simple  method  of  teaching  the  names  of  the  vowels  and  consonants  will 
be  by  means  of  four  cards  containing  the  four  '  stems  :' 


with  separate  adjustible  slips  showing  the  requisite  '  definers  :' 


I 


9G 


By  revolving  the  two  Consonant  Cards — with  '  mixed,'  '  shut,'  '  nasal/  or 
'  voice '  signs  attached — the  organic  varieties  of  each  elementary  aetion  will  be 
exhibited  ;  and  by  shifting  the  vowel  '  definers '  to  the  right  or  left  of  the  two 
vowel  '  stems,'  and  inverting  the  Cards,  all  the  varieties  of  vowel  formation  will 
be  presented  to  the  eye. 

Another  mode — perhaps  the  best  for  teaching  the  sounds — will  be  by  means 
of  a  set  of  twelve  square  cards  for  the  consonants  and  of  twenty  oblong  cards  for 
the  vowels.  As  the  teacher  turns  the  symbols  individually,  the  learner  will  form 
his  mouth  accordingly,  and  pronounce  the  sounds.  The  '  glides,'  '  modifiers,' 
and  other  symbols,  may  be  similarly  printed  on  separate  cards,  and  their  value 
explained  as  they  are  brought  into  use.  But  the  attention  of  beginners  should 
not  be  taken  up  with  symbols  which  are  not  to  be  immediately  brought  into 
application. 

These  methods  are  adapted  for  the  simultaneous  instruction  of  large 
numbers  of  learners. 

A  single  card  containing  all  the  symbols  for  Vowels  and  Consonants  may 
be  conveniently  used  in  teaching  single  pupils  or  small  classes.  The  following 
arrangement  will  present  the  alphabet  of  88  elements  as  the  Card  is  turned : — 


C    G    C    O    d    Q 

C    G    8    8    G    G 

1  I  I  3   1  1  I  1  3 

I 

ll£M*ff} 

1 

The  Glides  and  other  symbols  may  be  printed  on  the  back  of  the  card.    Thus :  — 


X 

(Uniform.) 

0     I      I      1 

, 

H 

lit- 

0 

I 

(Reversible.) 

I   V   ¥   J    A  0 

e 

c 

>  ?>    <    '    -  x 

r 

97 

In  teaching  foreigners,  the  instructor  will  make  use  of  the  Physiological 
Diagrams  to  communicate  the  organic  relations  of  the  symbols.  By  placing  his 
own  organs  in  the  positions  symbolized,  he  will  pronounce  the  sounds  for  the 
learner's  imitation ; — always  beginning  with  familiar  sounds.  In  this  way 
persons  of  ordinary  intelligence  may  be  taught  to  read  '  Visible  Speech '  without 
the  use  of  language  as  a  medium  of  instruction. 

The  Deaf  and  Dumb  will  be  readily  taught  to  adjust  their  organs  in  accord- 
ance with  the  symbols,  and  consequently  to  speak.  Their  pronunciation  may 
not  at  once  have  the  full  variety  of  ordinary  utterance  ;  but,  without  minute 
accuracy,  it  will  be  sufficiently  definite  for  intelligibility,  and  it  will  undoubtedly 
improve,  as  a  feeling  of  the  organic  positions  becomes  developed  by  exercise. 
The  Deaf  and  Dumb  should  practise  before  a  glass,  to  get  the  assistance  of  the 
eye  as  much  as  possible  in  directing  the  organs. 

The  Alphabet  will,  it  is  believed,  be  found  to  be  peculiarly  adapted  for 
tangible  reading  by  the  Blind.  The  quick  perceptions  of  touch  and  ear  usually 
manifested  by  the  Blind  should  enable  such  learners  to  pronounce  foreign 
languages  with  great  accuracy  from  the  symbols. 

Persons  who  suffer  from  Stammering  or  other  Impediments  of  Speech,  or 
who  fail  to  pronounce  any  of  the  elementary  sounds  correctly,  will  find  a 
special  value  in  the  symbols  of  '  Visible  Speech.'  A  knowledge  of  the  true 
actions  of  utterance,  and  an  exact  perception  of  the  organic  errors  of  impedi- 
ments, are  the  foundation  of  all  power  over  such  affections,  and  the  basis  of 
every  rational  system  for  the  removal  of  Impediments  and  Defects  of  articula- 
tion. In  the  mode  of  applying  this  knowledge,  much,  of  course,  depends  on 
individual  ability  and  experience  on  the  part  of  the  teacher  ;  but  the  knowledge 
itself  is  of  the  first  importance  to  the  learner,  and  this  knowledge  the  symbols 
communicate. 

TYPOGRAPHY   OF  VISIBLE   SPEECH. 

The  possibility  of  representing  the  organic  actions  of  speech  by  the 
revolutions  of  Single  Radical  Symbols  was  originally  suggested  by  the  fact,  that 
the  elementary  sounds  of  languages  are  produced  mainly  by  the  evolutions  of 
a  single  organ — the  tongue.  In  '  Visible  Speech  '  typography,  this  mono-sym- 
bolic principle  is  carried  out  with  an  effect  which  is  practically  the  same  to  the 
eye  by  whatever  number  of  types  the  printing  may  be  executed.  The  consonant- 
forms  '  Back,'  '  Front,'  '  Point,'  '  Lip,'  for  instance,  whether  printed  from  one 


98 

type  or  from  four  types,  are  merely  revolutions  of  one  symbol ;  and  in  like 
manner  all  the  '  Shut/  '  Nasal/  '  Divided/  aud  '  Mixed  '  Consonants  are  revolu- 
tions of  a  single  symbol  for  each  of  the  varieties. 

It  would  be  possible  to  print  all  languages  from  a  number  of  types 
corresponding  to  that  of  the  Radical  Symbols  [see  page  35]  ;  but  the  effect 
would  be  confusing  to  the  eye,  and  otherwise  objectionable.  Convenience 
requires  that  all  elementary  sounds — whatever  number  of  '  rudimental  symbols' 
they  may  involve — should  have  their  organic  and  other  constituent  signs 
embodied  in  individual  '  letters.'  Thus  :  '  Front-mixed-divided,  voice '  (th  in 
these)  ;  '  High-back-wide,  round '  (po  in  poor)  ;  '  Low-back-wide,  round '  (o  in 
on] ;  have  their  four  symbols  combined  in  their  respective  alphabetic  characters. 
Even  with  these  combinations,  the  number  of  types  required  for  universal  print- 
ing does  not  exceed  that  in  a  common  English  '  fount '  of  Roman  letters. 

To  exhibit  the  alphabetic  symbols  in  the  present  Work,  the  Fifty-two 
Consonants  have  been  printed  from  Sixteen  types ;  the  Thirty-six  Vowels 
from  Twenty  types  ;  and  the  Twelve  Glides  from  Eight  types.  In  this  arrange- 
ment, however,  the  letters  are  all  of  equal  height,  and  they  consequently  have 
the  effect  of  capitals.  On  this  principle  the  symbols  are  well  adapted  for  mixed 
Romanic  and  Speech  printing,  as  they  stand  out  very  clearly  on  a  page  of  the 
smallest  Roman  type  ;  but  for  speech-printing  by  itself  a  '  lower-case '  alphabet 
would  be  preferable.  This  is  obtained  by  casting  the  Consonants  on  oblong 
instead  of  square  bodies  ;  the  number  of  additional  types  required  being  twelve. 
The  aspect  which  the  letters  will  present  when  printed  from  a  '  lower-case ' 
fount  is  illustrated  in  the  Lithographed  Examples. 

The  latter  method  presents  several  important  advantages  :  it  saves  space, 
gives  a  pleasing  variety  to  the  typography,  and  is  more  convenient  to  the  printer, 
as  well  as  more  perspicuous  to  the  reader.  In  both  modes,  the  forms  of  the 
letters  are  identical ;  but  in  '  lower-case '  printing  the  vowels  ascend  or  descend 
beyond  the  line  of  the  consonants,  and  the  eye  is  thus  emphatically  informed 
of  the  number  of  syllables  in  every  word. 

A  fount  of  '  capitals '  added  to  a  '  lower-case '  fount  would  need  only 
thirty-six  extra  types,  as  the  '  glides '  and  '  modifiers '  would  not  require  to  be 
cast  in  duplicate.  But  capitals  may  be  altogether  dispensed  with.  A  simple 
sign  (/)  may  be  used  instead,  to  distinguish  the  first  word  of  a  sentence,  or  to 
show  proper  names,  &c.  [See  '  Visible  Speech  Writing.'] 


99 

The  simplicity  of  this  Typic  Alphabet  will  be  manifest  by  comparison  with 
the  '  Standard  Alphabet '  of  Professor  Lcpsius,  as  used  by  the  Church  Mission- 
ary Society.  The  latter  alphabet  consists  of  Roman  and  Greek  letters,  varied 
by  the  addition  of  diacritic  marks.  Seventeen  diacritics  are  used  above,  and 
fourteen  are  used  below  the  body  of  the  letters  ;  so  many  as  three  diacritics 
being  in  some  cases  applied  to  a  single  body.  The  number  of  '  lower-case  ' 
letters  thus  employed  exceeds  280,  and  of  these  above  200  require  to  be  '  cut ' 
for  every  fount  used.  But  even  with  this  cumbrous  typography,  the  '  Standard 
Alphabet '  is  not  complete,  and  its  letters  are  only  arbitrarily  associated  with 
their  sounds.  Some  of  the  diacritics,  indeed,  have  a  uniform  physiological 
value,  but  the  bulk  of  the  letters — as  in  all  other  alphabets — directly  tax  the 
learner's  memory  ;  and  the  relations  of  sounds  cannot  be  discovered  from  their 
symbols.  This  source  of  difficulty — "  as  old  as  written  language,  and  an 
obstacle  which  has  seemed  to  inhere  in  the  nature  of  writing  itself"* — is 
effectually  removed  by  '  Visible  Speech.'  In  this  respect  the  system  stands 
alone  :  so  that  even  if  an  alphabet  capable  of  representing  all  possible  shades 
of  sound  could  be  formed  on  the  basis  of  old  alphabets,  and  even  if  the  number 
of  its  letters  did  not  exceed  that  of  the  Visible  Speech  Alphabet,  the  latter  would 
still  have  immeasurably  the  advantage  ;  because  the  sound  of  every  symbol  is 
deducible  from  the  form  of  the  symbol  itself,  without  any  encumbrance  to  the 
reader's  memory.  In  the  words  of  an  eminent  critic  of  the  system  :  '  A  great 
many  attempts  have  been  made  to  spell  words,  but  Visible  Speech  spells 
spelling.'* 

All  the  ordinary  marks  of  punctuation  and  reference  may  be  employed 
as  usual. 

Various  forms  of  typography  of  the  system  are  illustrated  in  the  Plates  at 
the  end  of  the  volume. 

VISIBLE   SPEECH    WRITING. 

In  adapting  the  Alphabet  for  current  writing,  the  print-forms  of  the  letters 
have  been  so  closely  preserved  that  a  learner  who  has  mastered  the  one  will 
have  no  difficulty  in  familiarizing  himself  with  the  other.  The  Script  Symbols, 
as  shown  in  the  Plates,  produce  a  flowing  and  elegant  caligraphy,  easily  written 
and  easily  read.  The  arrangement  was  arrived  at  after  much  experiment,  and 

*  See  Article  from  the  '  Atlicna>um,'  page  29. 

N 


100 

it  has  been  tested  for  a  considerable  period  in  the  writing  of  several  languages. 
Care  has  been  taken  to  avoid  ambiguous  lines,  and  distinctions  depending  on 
'  dots '  and  '  strokes,'  as  in  the  i  and  the  /  of  the  common  script  alphabet. 
With  the  exception  of  the  '  Rounded  Glides,'  each  character  is  conveniently 
written  without  lifting  the  pen. 

The  following  Principles  of  Symbolization  are  introduced  in  the  Script 
Alphabet  :— 

I.  Voiced  Consonants   and  Primary  Vowels  are   distinguished  by  a  loop 
formed  in  the  'hair-stroke'  of  the  letters.     Characters  without  a  loop  are  there- 
fore '  voiceless '  consonants,  or  '  wide '  vowels. 

II.  Rounded  Vowels  have  a  bend  or  hook  in  the  'body-line'  of  the  letters. 
The  'round  glides'  alone  preserve  the  'cross-stroke'  of  the  print  symbols. 

III.  Nasal  Consonants  have  the  ordinary  nasal  sign,  written  horizontally. 
In  the  case  of  the  '  front '  (and  '  point ')  '  shut '  (and  '  nasal ')  consonants,  the 
'  voice-loop '  is   not  added  to  the  '  voiceless '  forms  ;    but,   for   simplicity,    the 
'  organic  symbol,'  in  these  letters,  is  held  to  include  a  loop,  when  it  is  formed  by 
crossing  the  body-fene  of  the  letter. 

In  the  case  of  the  '  front '  (and  '  point ')  '  divided  '  consonants,  the  '  voice-loop ' 
might  have  been  inserted  in  the  centre  of  the  symbol — as  in  the  '  back '  (and 
'  lip1)  '  divided  '  consonants — so  as  to  save  a  motion  of  the  pen  ;  but  symmetry 
and  perspicuity  in  combinations,  have  been  preferred  to  mere  brevity.  The 
writing  of  English  is,  notwithstanding,  one-fifth  shorter  than  in  common 
long-hand. 

Initial  letters  are  distinguished  as  'capitals'  by  a  stroke  (/)  prefixed.  In 
&z#dT-writing  this  sign  may  be  limited  to  Vowels,  because  the  consonants  admit 
of  being  written,  ad  libitttm,  on  a  larger  scale  for  '  capitals ' — as  in  common 
writing. 

The  Script  Alphabet  is  composed  of  a  remarkably  small  number  of  forms, 
being,  in  this  respect,  even  simpler  than  the  Print  Alphabet ;  and  in  both  sets 
of  letters  the  symbols  are  uniformly  reversible  to  show  the  organic  relations  of 
the  different  elements.  Thus  : — 

Lip-Consonants  are  the  reverse  of  Back-Consonants. 
Point-Consonants     "  "         Front-Consonants. 

Front- Vowels  "  "         Back-Vowels. 

Low-Vowels  "  "         High-Vowels. 


The  only  exception  to  this  arrangement  is  in  the  case  of  the  '  front-mixed ' 
and  '  point-mixed  '  consonants,  which  are  necessarily  varied,  because  the  '  pot- 
hook,' which  is  their  appropriate  organic  sign,  presents  no  difference  of  shape 
when  inverted.  Otherwise  the  number  of  types  required  to  '  letter-press '  the 
Script  Alphabet  corresponds  exactly  to  the  number  in  '  lower-case '  printing, 

The  vowels,  it  will  be  observed,  are  represented  in  script  by  a  single  symbol 
for  each  class  of  vowels  ;  the  varieties  of  '  high,'  '  mid,'  and  '  low,'  in  each  class, 
being  shown  by  the  mere  ascent  and  descent  of  the  lines.  The  same  principle 
might,  of  course,  be  applied  to  the  other  alphabet,  for  '  lower-case '  printing  ; 
the  different  positions  of  the  '  defmers '  to  mark  '  high,'  '  mid,'  and  '  low ' 
varieties  in  the  '  capital '  alphabet,  being  only  necessary  with .  letters  of  equal 
height.  In  this  way  the  vowel  scheme  of  thirty-six  elements  might  be  com- 
pletely presented  in  '  lower-case '  print,  by  no  more  than  twelve  symbols. 

The  Script  Alphabet  would  itself  form  an  excellent  '  lower-case '  alphabet 
for  general  use.  The  characters  would,  of  course,  have  the  slope  of  italics,  or 
of  Greek  letters  ;  but  they  would  be  learned,  by  beginners,  almost  as  easily  as 
the  other  symbols,  and  their  employment  in  general  printing  would  be  attended 
with  this  advantage  that  the  letters  in  hand-writing  and  in  press-printing,  would 
in  all  points  exactly  correspond.  The  aspect  of  the  Script  Symbols,  as  they 
would  appear  in  letter-press,  is  shown  in  one  of  the  Plates. 

VISIBLE   SPEECH   TELEGRAPHY. 

The  indefiniteness  of  ordinary  letters  is  productive  of  much  inconvenience 
in  international  Telegraphy.  Messages  cannot  be  transmitted  in  their  original 
languages  through  foreign  countries,  but,  for  the  convenience  of  operators,  must 
be  translated, — of  course  at  the  serious  risk  of  error,  and  to  the  entire  destruc- 
tion of  verbatim  accuracy.  The  system  of  '  Visible  Speech '  will  render  the 
telegraphing  of  words  through  any  country  equally  certain  and  easy,  in  all 
languages.  The  operator,  while  he  may  not  understand  a  syllable  of  the  writing, 
will  transmit  the  ipsissima  verba,  and  the  very  sounds  of  the  original,  as  a  viva 
voce  utterance  to  the  receiver. 

In  connection  with  Printing  Telegraphs,  no  special  training  will  be  required 
by  the  operator  ;  as  the  new  types  are  '  composed '  side  by  side  in  the  same 
manner  as  ordinary  types.  A  glance  at  the  Table  will  show  that  the  characters, 
when  properly  arranged,  will  be  unmistakably  selected  with  facility  by  the 
merest  novice. 


102 


For  Needle  Telegraphs  which  communicate  arbitrary  signs,  dial,  and  other 
instruments,  the  '  Visible  Speech '  symbols  must,  of  course,  be  associated  with 
a  sufficient  code  of  signals.  The  symmetrical  tabulation  into  which  the  symbols 
naturally  fall  renders  transmission  by  serial  numbers  extremely  simple.  Two 
numbers  must  be  signalled  for  each  letter  ; — the  first  referring  to  the  column, 
and  the  second  to  the  line  where  the  letter  stands  in  the  Telegraphic  Table. 
The  numbers  i  to  12  denote,  in  this  way,  the  places  of  all  the  symbols,  and 
leave  ample  room  for  punctuation,  and  for  other  necessary  or  convenient  signs. 
Telegraph  clerks  who  become  expert  at  sounding  the  symbols,  will  soon  be 
enabled  to  act  as  receivers  and  deliverers  of  messages  for  the  convenience  of 
those  who  cannot  put  their  words  into  Visible  Speech,  or  decipher  them  from 
the  symbols.  Thus  it  should  ultimately  be  possible  for  a  stranger  to  enter  a 
Telegraph  Office,  pronounce  his  message,  and  have  it  despatched  in  his  mother- 
tongue  by  one  totally  ignorant  of  the  import  of  the  sounds  ;  and  for  the  receiver 
of  the  message  to  hear  it  intelligibly  pronounced  from  the  writing  by  an  official 
equally  unacquainted  with  the  meaning  of  what  he  reads. 

The  following  is  the  arrangement  of  the  symbols  for  a  complete 

COSMOPOLITAN  TELEGRAPHIC  TABLE, 
i.   2.   3.   4.    5.   6   7.   8.   9.   10.   11.  12. 


I. 

C 

O 

O 

O 

I 

1 

I 

i 

0 

i 

2. 

G 

Q 

£3 

D 

I 

3 

I 

C 

0 

1 

3- 

C 

O 

O 

3 

K 

J 

I 

I 

X 

) 

4- 

G 

& 

& 

3 

y 

1 

I 

I 

i 

t 

5- 

a 

Q 

O 

D 

i 

3 

I 

C 

? 

6. 

G 

Q 

O 

9 

> 

J 

I 

I 

o> 

< 

7- 

C 

O 

Q 

3 

i 

1 

i 

I 

5 

?> 

8. 

e 

& 

as 

B 

? 

J 

\ 

« 

e 

<* 

9- 

e 

CO 

CO 

S 

X 

J 

I 

t 

{ 

C 

10. 

e 

9Q 

OS 

e 

¥ 

1 

I 

1 

i 

3 

11. 

a 

CD 

Q 

3 

1 

} 

n 

{ 

A 

X 

12. 

G 

cn 

® 

D 

5 

J 

J 

t 

V 

O 

103 


Plan  of  the  foregoing  Table. 


Column.                                                   Line. 

i  to  4. 

[  I.  to    6.  Voiceless. 
Consonants.  4 

\7-  "    12.  Vocal. 

5. 

Glides,     ) 

J 

7.  "    12.  Round. 

6  to  8. 

Vowels.  ) 

9,  10. 

Aspirates  and  Modifiers. 

II,    12. 

Punctuation  and  Special  Signs. 

Example. 


*4-9,  8-4,  2-8,  8-4,  4-11,  3-9,   10-2, 
8      I      &      I       0      CO       { 

V         I          S          I  B          L          E 


2-2,  4-5,  8-1,   10-2,  3-5,  3-2, 


n    D    I 

S          P         E 


a    u 

C         II 


3-5,   8-5,  3-9,  8-3,   i-u,  3-7,  7-5,  4-3,  8-4. 

a     c    GO    i     a    o    i    3    i 

TELE  G          RATIIY 


Proposed  Needle- Signals  for  Numbers. 

The  Signals  at  present  in  use  will  perfectly  suffice  for  the  transmission  of 
Visible  Speech.  The  first  twelve  of  the  ordinary  alphabetic  signs  may  be  used 
to  express  the  columns,  and  the  second  twelve  the  lines  of  the  Table.  But  a 
simpler  code  of  signals  may  be  substituted.  The  following  is  proposed  : — 

[Needle  to  Left  v,  Needle  to  Right  ^.] 

i       2       3      4      5  ;      6      7      8      9       10;       ii       12 

\        \\      u\     W      v ;       /       //      ///      /A        A  ;       vi       M 


*  The  first  number  refers  to  the  column,  and  the  second  to  the  line,  in  the  Table.     Thus:     4-9  [col.  4: 
line  0  ] 


104 

PRACTICAL   TESTS. 

The  practical  effect  of  the  principle  of  '  Visible  Speech  '  may  be  thoroughly 
tested  by  means  of  the  examples  furnished  in  the  next  page,  and  at  the  end  of  the 
volume.  All  readers  who  master  the  principle  of  symbolization  in  connection  with 
any  language,  should  vocalize  these  words  and  sentences  with  perfect  uniformity. 
The  illustrations  have  been  selected  from  the  tests  dictated  in  the  course  of  the 
experiments  referred  to  at  page  19.  The  examples  embrace  such  a  wide  range 
of  phonetic  elements,  that  the  reader  who  can  pronounce  these  with  accuracy  will 
have  little  to  learn  in  connection  with  the  utterance  of  any  tongue. 

The  Vocabularies  of  Test  Words  are  arranged  with  the  initial  letters  in 
alphabetic  order,  to  exemplify  the  proper  classification  of  the  elements  for  works 
of  reference.  The  first  of  these  lists  is  printed  from  the  experimental  types  ;  but, 
in  order  to  show  the  different  modes  in  which  the  symbols  may  be  presented  to 
the  eye,  the  other  illustrations  are  given  in  Plates  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

The  alphabetic  order  of  the  Consonants  is  : — 

i.  Throat;    2.  Back;    3.  Front;    4.  Point;    5.  Lip. 

The  varieties  of  each  Organic  class  follow  the  order  : — 
i.  Primary  ;  2.  Mixed  ;  3.  Divided  ;  4.  Mixed  Divided  ;  5.  Shut ;  6.  Nasal. 

The    '  voiced '    consonant    of  each  species    immediately    follows    the 
'  voiceless '  element  of  the  same  mechanism. 

The  Vowels  arc  correspondingly  classified  : — 

i.  Back  ;    2.  Mixed  ;    3.  Front  ;   4.  Round. 

The    '  wide '  sounds   of  each    Organic   class   immediately  follow  the 
'Primary'  sounds  of  the  same  mechanism. 

The  elements  in  each  class  of  Vowels  follow  the  order : — 
i.  High  ;    2.  Mid  ;    3.  Low. 

The  Illustrations  in  the  Plates  include,  besides  English  in  various  forms,  a 
number  of  foreign  and  dialectic  sentences.  A  large  proportion  of  the  latter  arc 
selected  from  the  Scottish  Dialects,  which  are  particularly  rich  in  sounds,  and 
consequently  difficult  to  unaccustomed  organs.  A  Caledonian  ear  may  be 
found  in  every  quarter  of  the  globe,  so  that  readers  may  have  the  means  of 
readily  testing  the  accuracy  of  their  phonetic  essays  in  connection  with  these 
sentences.  But  the  experimentum  cnicis,  applicable  everywhere,  is  uniformity 
amon?  different  readers. 


105 


ALPHABETIC  VOCABULARY  OF  TEST  WORDS.— Initial  Vowels. 


1JC_ 

30'3IG01  (Sc.) 


nc_ 
rpKDOitf  (Sc.; 

3<x)3'QJlB3 
3  DC?* 


JQ-I 
JlIKSc.) 

(Am.) 


1GD'03C 


13'CttlCOB 

u& 


(Sc.) 


(Ga.) 


(Sc.) 


ICDOVGOIIQ) 


IVOCQO 


(it.) 


(Sc.) 
fQ'OnQ  (F.) 
CU'hlHOGOI 


}J_,CJ_11  (Sc.) 
!DlQBlQD(Pro.) 


HDBCQO  (Prov.; 


CIQOI00JC  (Sc.) 


H001 


icm 

tQOJ'OHD 


JOOf 

JDlf 

JO'OK 


ICC01'31COI  (Sc.) 
I1BOI  (Sc.)  HQCO 

lOQl'DlQIDl         iQ^l- 
IDQI  QICIQIO 


(Prov.) 

CQOQI-B3QI  (Sc.)      ifDIp  (Prov.) 
CH'OJf  11  (Port.)         ilOOSCDIO  (Sc. 

JfQCi  (Cock.) 

1050 
(Ge.) 


^GIO  (Sc.) 
IQO^ 


(F.) 


,U{|0  (Sc.) 


1D3B  Ql'DCI 
11  JlKSc.) 


till  (F.) 

tl  01  CK3  (Sc. 


(Manx) 


HGOW 


1001(1)^300!         ^1B  ,GKG5  (Sc.) 
Jl  ,11  (Sc.)  t}Q  rtlQ  (Cock.) 


Tlie  accent  is  on  t!ie  first  sylluLle,  unless  otherwise  expressed. 


VISIBLE    SPEECH 
APPLIED    TO    ENGLISH. 


o 


100 


VISIBLE   SPEECH    APPLIED   TO   ENGLISH. 

The  purpose  of  this  Work  is  served  when  the  details  of  the  system  are 
presented  with  completeness,  so  as  to  enable  orthoepists  in  different  countries  to 
define  their  various  native  sounds,  and  to  tabulate  the  appropriate  physiological 
symbols  into  a  standard  alphabet. 

Many  syllabic  sounds  are  matters  of  dispute,  and  are  variously  analyzed 
by  different  authorities.  The  readiest  way  to  settle  all  such  questions  will  be 
to  symbolize  the  exact  utterance  of  some  approved  speakers,  and  from  a  com- 
parison of  the  independent  pronunciations  of  two  or  three  such  selected  oralists 
to  fix  the  alphabet  for  Visible  Speech  printing. 

The  characteristic  sounds  of  individual  languages  must  obviously  be  thus 
discriminated  from  native  utterance  ;  and  there  will  be  a  manifest  advantage  to 
international  consistency  in  the  application  of  the  physiological  symbols,  from 
having  a  series  of  alphabets  constructed  by  the  same  symbolizers.  The  atten- 
tion of  British,  American,  and  Foreign  Academies  is  directed  to  the  desirability 
of  adopting  this  method  of  obtaining  a  complete  tabulation  of  their  national 
sounds,  for  the  use  of  native  as  well  as  of  foreign  learners. 

The  Author's  professional  familiarity  with  the  native  sounds  of  English, 
enables  him  to  furnish  a  Standard  English  Alphabet,  which  may  be  accepted, 
in  the  meantime,  as  conveying  a  faithful  representation  of  vernacular  usage. 
The  scheme  will  also  serve  as  a  model  which  may  be  followed  in  the  arrange- 
ment of  other  local  alphabets. 


110 


TABLE   OF   ENGLISH    ELEMENTS, 

SHOWING   THEIR    POSITION   IN   THE   UNIVERSAL   ALPHABET. 


CONSONANTS. 
Back.   Front.   Point.     Lip.  Key  W 


ords. 


Back. 


VOWELS.* 
Mixed.  Front.  Key  Words. 


r 

see 
ear 

O 

Q 

yes 

race 

3 

c 

up 
urn 

say 

Q 

O 

D 

so 

show 

why 

i 

ell 

& 

fcS 

a 

ooze 

rouge 

we 

1* 

T* 

i 

-tion 
-tious 
-er 

the 

•es 

ill 

3 

few 

3 

I 

c 

ask 

a 
-al 
-ance 

air 
-ed 
-ment 

CO 

3 

lay 

view 

J 

I 

I 

ah 
arm 

err 

an 

C3 

thin 

1 

pool 

OQ 

then 

J 

go 

a 

O 

D 

key 

tea 

pea 

J 

law 

G 

Q 

G 

gay 

day 

bay 

1 

T* 

poor 
good 

-ure 
-ful 

J 

I* 

ore 

-ory 

G 

05 

B 

sing 

sin 

him 

J 

J* 

on 
or 

-or 
-ward 

ASPIRATE,  GLIDES,  AND  MODIFIERS. 


O 

I 

I* 

R 

y 

¥* 

i 

\ 

1 

1 

he 

weary 

now 

boy 

air 

our 

know 

kind 

long 

accent 

high 

fiery 

out 

fie 

sir 

soul 

girl 

day 

arm 

now 

*  The  sounds  marked  *  occur  only  in  unaccented  syllables,  and  in  colloquial  speech. 


Ill 


ENGLISH    PRONUNCIATION. 

The  irregularities  of  Letters  have  made  the  mere  deciphering  of  English 
words  a  work  of  difficulty  to  learners  ;  and  the  accurate  pronunciation  of  the 
language  has  become  a  special  art,  the  teaching  of  which  has  called  into 
existence  an  extensive  literature  of  phoneticised  Vocabularies  and  Dictionaries. 
'  Visible  Speech'  furnishes  a  simpler — in  fact,  the  simplest  possible — key  to 
Orthographic  Reading.  The  use  of  the  system  for  this  purpose  will  be  attended 
with  the  advantage  that  pronunciation  will  be  taught  with  certainty  and 
uniformity,  according  to  any  standard — whether  scholastic,  colloquial,  or 
dialectic — without  in  any  way  interfering  with  ordinary  letters,  or  unsettling  the 
aspect  of  words  to  the  eye,  as  by  phonetic  spelling. 

The  following  Table  exhibits  the  English  Sounds  in  connection  with  their 
various  '  orthographies.'  The  pronunciations  indicated  exemplify  the  varieties 
of  accentual  and  unaccentual  utterance,  according  to  colloquial — but  not  vulgar — 
usage : — 

THE  SOUNDS  OF  ENGLISH  LETTERS,  AND  'ORTHOGRAPHIES' 

OF  ENGLISH  SOUNDS. 

CONSONANTS. 

symbols  Equivalent  Orthographies. 

O h,  wh  ;  in  hole,  whole. 

Cl c,  cc,  cch,  ch,  ck,  cq,  cqu,  gh,  k,  ke,  kh,  Ik,  q,  qu,  que,  x  (ks,  ksh)  ;  in 

can,  account,  Bacchus,  character,  back,  acquit,  lacquer,  hough,  kill, 
lake,  khan,  walk,  quit,  quay,  pique,  tax  (QQ),  anxious  (Q£J). 

CH c>  k  ;  in  card,  kind. 

Q ckgu,  g,  gg,  gh,  gue  ;  in  blackguard,  leg,  egg,  ghost,  plague. 

€H g,  gu  J  in  girl,  guard,  guide. 

0  n,  nd,  ng,  ngue  ;  in  ink,  handkerchief,  song,  tongue. 

O e,  i,  j,  u  (yoo),  y  ;  in  righteous,  pinion,  hallelujah,  use,  you. 

Q c,  ce,  ps,  s,  sc,  sch,  se,  ss,  tzs ;  in  cell,  ice,  psalm,  sale,  science,  schism, 

base,  loss,  britzska. 


112 

Speech 
Symbols. 

£12 ce,  cz,  ds,  s,  sc,  se,  sh,  ss,  x,  z,  zc,  zz  ;  in  suffice,  Czar,  Windsor,  as,  discern, 

ease,  dishonour,  scissors,  xystus,  zeal,  baize,  buzz. 

£*2 h,  phth,  th,  tth  ;  in  eighth,  apophthegm,  thing,  Matthew. 

£12 th,  the  ;  in  then,  breathe. 

Q r,  rh,  rr,  rrh  ;  in  race,  rhubarb,  mirror,  myrrhine. 

£J c,  ch,  chs,  psh,  s,  sc,  sch,  sh,  ss,  t ;  in  ocean,  chaise,  fuchsia,  pshaw,  tension, 

conscience,  schedule,  shame,  omission,  nation. 

P|5 g,  ge,  j,  s,  ss,  t,  z;  in  giraffe,  rouge,  jambeaux,  vision,  abscission,  transi- 
tion, azure. 

00 gl,  I  le,  11,  In,  si,  sle  ;  in  seraglio,  late,  tale,  all,  kiln,  island,  isle. 

03{ le,  tie;  in  apple,  castle. 

Q bt,  ct,  cht,  ed,  ght,  phth,  t,  te,  th,  tt ;  in  debt,  indict,  yacht,  stopped. 

bought,  phthisic,  at,  late,  thyme,  cottage. 

Q bd,  d,  de,  dd,  ddh,  Id  ;  /;/  bdellium,,  sad,  bade,  add,  buddhism,  would. 

£5 dn,  gn,  hn,  kn,  mn,  mp,  n,  ne,  nn,  sn,  sne  ;  in  Wednesday,  sign,  John, 

know,  hymn,  compter,  dun,  done,  inn,  puisne,  demesne. 

£5| on,  ten  ;  in  button,  fasten,  softening  (when  a  trisyllable). 

£) wh  ;  in  what. 

3 o,  u,  w  ;  in  one  [^£5],  quick,  suite,  way. 

3 f,  fe,  ff,  ft,  gh,  If,  ph,  phe,  pph  ;  in  leaf,  safe,  staff,  soften,  laugh,  half, 

physic,  ouphe,  sapphire. 

Q f,  ph,  v,  ve,  zv  ;  in  of,  nephew,  vain,  save,  rendezvous. 

Q gh,  Ifp,  p,  pe,  ph,  pp ;  in  hiccough,  halfpenny,  pay,  tape,  ophthalmia, 

tippet. 

O b,  bb,  be,  pb  ;  in  crab,  ebb,  globe,  cupboard. 

Q chm,  gm,  1m,  m,  mb,  me,  mm,  mn,  sme  ;  in  drachm,  paradigm,  calm,  aim, 

lamb,  same,  common,  condemn,  disme. 

0  j m  ;  in  chasm,  rhythm. 


113 

VOWELS  AND  GLIDES. 

Symbols.  Equivalent  '  Orthographies' 

3 0,00,  ou,  u,  wo  ;  Undone,  blood,  young,  up,  twopence.     [In  unaccented 

syllables,  generally  changed  to  1]. 
3V or,  our,  ur;  in  word,  journey,  furnish.      [Variously  pronounced  IV,  I  V 

(Cockney),  ](,)  (Scotch),  jy  (Irish).] 
1 (for  3  unaccented),  eo,  io,  iou,  o,  oa,  oi,  ou,  ow ;  in  dungeon,  motion, 

conscious,  abandon,  cupboard,  avoirdupoise,  honour,  bellows  (noun). 

IV (for  jy  unaccented),  er,  ir,  wer,  yr  ;  in  paper,  circuitous,  answer,  martyr. 

3| a,  au  ;  in  ask,  path,  half,  chant,  aunt.     [Variously  pronounced  Jf,  Jf, 

(Cockney),  \\  (Scotch),  \\  (Irish).] 

3 ..-(for  J  unaccented),  a  ;  in  artistic,  participate,  cartoon. 

H eigh,  ey,  eye,  i,  ie,  igh,  ui,  uy,  y,  ye;  in  height,  eyeing,  eye,  time,  tie, 

nigh,  guide,   buy,  by,  r'ye.     [In   unaccented   syllables,  generally 

changed  to  £,  as  in  infinite,  futile ;  otherwise,  pronounced  Ifi,  as 

in  likewise], 
ire,  yre,  oir ;  in  fire,  lyre,  choir.      [In  liar,  pliers,  prior,. &c.,  the  sound 

heard  is  dissyllabic  QUV,  3JUV,  Ofijy,  &c.)] 

ir,  ier,  &c. ;  in  wiry,  fiery,  &c. 

o,  ou,  ow  ;  in  compter,  thou,  now.     [In  unaccented  syllables,  generally 

changed  to  3  (or  ]_),  as  in  conscious  ;  otherwise  pronounced  "\,l,  as 

in  outshine]. 
our,  ower;  in  hour,  power.     [In  unaccented  syllables,  generally  changed 

to  3  (or  1),  as  in  honour  ;  otherwise,  pronounced  3  ¥,  as  in  ourselves. 

31IQ (or  3iQ),  owery,  &c.  ;  in  dowery,  flowery,  showery,  &c. 

J{ ah,  al ;  in  ah,,  palm,  salve. 

JV ar,  er,  ear,  uar  ;  in  hard,  clerk,  heart,  guard.     [In  unaccented  syllables, 

pronounced  3  V,  as  in  barbarian  ;  in  terminations,  generally  XV,  as 

in  altar,  grammar,  particular.] 

JIG (or  J|Q),  arr,  &c. ;  in  starry,  tarry  (adjective). 

Jfi ai,  ay,  aye ;  in  aisle,  ay,  ayes.     (In  naive,  naivete,  the  sound  heard  is 

dissyllabic  (JJ).] 

I a,  ai,  e;  in  cabbage,  certain  (see  I),  the,  pretty,  places  (noun). 

1 (for   3    unaccented),  as   in  ana,   aside,  away,   identify,   mountaineer; 

for  "[,  unaccented),  as  in  annoy,  appear,  assist,  capital,  chapman, 


114 

Speech 
Symbols. 

distant,  instance;  and  (XV  for  jy,  in  terminations),  as  in  peculiar, 
notary,  &c. 

jy  .  er,  ear,  ir,  yr,  uer ;  in  prefer,  earnest,  firm,  myrrh,  guerdon. 

£f e,  ea,  ee,  e'e,  ei,  eo,  ey,  eye,  i,  ie ;  in  eve,  eat,  see,  e'en,  conceive,  people, 

key,  keyed,  fatigue,  field. 

£ ae,  e;  in  minutiae,  before,  decide,  erect,  return  secure. 

£y ear,  eer,  ere,  e're,  ier ;  in  near,  beer,  here,  we're,  pier. 

£10 aer,  er,  ear,  eer;  in  aerie,  era,  weary,  peeress. 

Cfi a,  ai,  ac,  au,  ay,  aye,  ea,  ei,  ey,  eye  ;  in  age,  aim,  gaol,  gauge,  day,  aye, 

steak,  vein,  obey,  preyed.  [Before  R,  changed  to  £ ;  and  i  n 
unaccented  syllables,  pronounced  [  ;  in  terminations,  generally 
I  or  1]. 

\ a,  ai,  ay,  e,  ea,  ei,  eo,  ie,  u,  ue ;  in  many,  said,  says,  very,  bread,  heifer, 

jeopardy,  friend,  bury,  guess.  [Before  R,  when  not  followed  by  a 
vowel,  changed  to  J,  as  in  her,  term  ;  and  in  unaccented  syllables, 
generally  changed  to  []. 

£... a,  ai,  e,  ea,  ee,  ei,  ey,  i,  ia,  ie,  o,  u,  ui,  uy,  y ;  in  cabbage,  certain  (often 

X),  England,  antelope,  guinea,  breeches,  forfeit,  monkey,  ill,  in- 
finite, spirit,  miniature,  sieve,  women,  busy,  build,  plaguy,  hymn, 
happy.  [Before  R,  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel,  changed  to  X, 
as  in  sir,  firm]. 

[ (for    \   unaccented),   e,   &c. ;  in  sacred,   forest,   minstrel,  peremptory, 

majesty,  effeminate,  elliptic,  emphatic,  endeavour,  erroneous,  ex- 
cept, goodness,  element  (IGOiB  CCDO),  &c- 

[y are,  aer,  air,  ayr,  ayer,  ere,  ear,  e'er,  eir,  eyre;  in  care,  aer,  pair,  Ayr, 

prayer  (petition),  there,  bear,  ne'er,  their,  Eyre.  [Variously  pro- 
nounced iy,  jy  (Cockney),  [|0  (Scotch),  [|Q  (Irish).  In  gayer, 
greyer,  layer,  prayer  (one  who  prays),  &c.,  the  radical  sound  of  [ 
is  heard,  and  the  combination  is  dissyllabic  (Cfiiy).  In  Mayor  the 
pronunciation  is  generally  monosyllabic  (C¥)  ;  distinguished  from 
mare  only  by  the  '  rounded  '  quality  of  the  termination.  Thus  : 
QCy,  mare;  Q($,  mayor]. 

QQ ar,  aer,  air,  ere,  ear,  eir,  &c. ;  in  canary,  aeronaut,  fairy,  therein,  bearing, 

heiress,  &c.     [Scotch,  [{0  ;  Irish,  £{(,)]. 

"[ a,  ai  ;  in  man,  amber,  carry,  accept,  admit,  alternate,  alphabet,  acci- 
dent, plaid.     [In  terminations  and  in  prefixes — when  followed  by 


115 

Speech 

Symbols. 

a  single  consonant  sound  —  generally  changed   to   \,  as  in  fatal, 

errand,  appoint,  attend,  £c.] 
if  .........  eu,  ew,  ewe,  o,  oe,  ceu,  oo,  ooe,  ou,  u,  ue,  ui,  wo  ;  in  rheum,  grew,  brewed, 

do,  shoe,  manoeuvre,  bloom,  wooed,  through,  rule,  rue,  fruit,  two. 

[Before  R,  and  in  unaccented  syllables,  changed  to  J]. 
-}  ...........  o,  ewe,  &c.  ;  in  doer,  brewer,  &c.     [These  words  are  dissyllables 


......  eau,  eo,  eu,  ew,  ewe,  iew,  u,  ue,  yew,  you,  yu  ;  in  beauty,  feodal,  feud,  few, 

ewe,  view,  use,  due,  yew,  youth,  yule.  [After  R  and  SH,  pro- 
nounced \\.  After  L  and  S,  pronounced  \\\.  Before  R,  changed 
to  Ol]- 

\\\  ........  ew,    u,   ue,   ui  ;    in  lewd,  lute,   sue,   suit.     [Before    R,   changed  to  ^. 

S  preceding  f\  is  apt  to  be  changed  into  SH,  as  in  the  vulgar  pro- 
nunciation of  suit  (£J?1{O)'  The  tendency  is  legitimized  by 
custom  in  the  words  sugar,  and  sure,  and  in  the  terminations 
scions,  sial,  sion.  In  sue,  suit,  and  other  words,  Qfi  is  correctly 
heard.] 

}^  ........  .aut,  eau,  eo,  ew,  ewe,  o,  oa,  oe,  oo,  ou,  ow,  owe  ;  in  hautboy,  beau, 

yeoman,  shew,  sewed,  old,  oak,  foe,  brooch,  soul,  crow,  owed. 
[Before  R,  and  in  unaccented  syllables,  pronounced  }.] 

}  ...........  o,  ow,  &c.  ;  in  goer,  mower,  &c.     [These  words  are  dissyllables  (Q3I1)!, 

BUY,  &c.)] 

J  |  .........  a,  au,  aw,  awe,  &c.  ;  in  all,  laud,  fraught,  taught,  s:uv,  lawyer,  awed,  &c. 

J  ...........  a,  au,  £c.  ;  in  salt,  want,  laudanum,  &c. 

jy  .........  ar  ;  in  war,  ward,  swarm,  dwarf. 

JI0  (or  JjO)  arr;  in  warrior. 

5-  ...........  (for  i  unaccented)   o,  oo,  ou,  u,  ue  ;  in  to,   into,  together,  arrowroot, 

rendezvous,  virulent,  brutality,  tissue  :  (for  J  accented)  woman, 
book,  cook,  should,  courier,  bull,  put,  sugar,  hurrah.  [J  is  heard 
in  the  Scotch  pronunciation  of  book,  cook,  &c.] 

J^  .........  oor,  our,  ure,  &c.  ;  in  poor,  moor,  tour,  sure. 

'J-JQ  ......  oor,  ur,  &c.  ;  in  poorer,  surer,  assuring,  tourist. 

(t)^.y  ......  ure,  &c.  ;  in  cure,  pure,  endure,  ensure,  immure,  &c. 

01IQ...ur,  &c-  ;  in  fur7>  Purer>  enduring,  &c. 

ure,  &c.  ;  in  lure,  allure,  &c. 
.....  ur,  &c.  ;  in  lurid,  alluring,  &c. 

f 


116 

Speech 
.Symbols. 

J o;  ///  voracious,  original,  oriental,  forensic,  &c.  ;    (for  }].  unaccented) 

aoh,  o,  ow,  &c.  ;  in  Pharaoh,  obey,  theology,  philosophy,  vocation, 
borrow,  &c. 

3-^ oar,  o'er,  oor,  or,  ore,  orps,  our,  owar ;  in  boar,  o'er,  door,  floor,  borne, 

torn,  sore,  corps,  pour,  tournament,  towards. 

3-IQ or,  &c.  ;  in  glory,  horal,  soaring,  pouring,  &c. 

J| oa,  ou,  &c.  ;  in  broad,  thought,  sought,  c*(:c. 

J o,  oa,  ou,  ow  ;  w  often,  honest,  foreign,  horrible,  orifice,  groat,  hough, 

knowledge.     [In  the  termination  on,  ]  (or  1)  is  generally  heard  ; 
as  in  abandon,  lemon,  &c.] 

jy ...    aor,  eor,  or;  in  extraordinary,  George,  order,  born,  nor.    [The  termina- 
tion or  is  pronounced  jy,  as  in  spectator,  tailor,  &c.] 

Jfl eoi,  oe,  oi,  oy  ;  in  burgeois,  oboe,  oil,  coin,  rejoice,  boy,  joy,  royal. 

jy (for  IV  unaccented)  ure  ;  in  azure,  fissure,  measure,  pleasure,  seizure. 

(for  0)1  unaccented)  u,  &c. ;   ///volume,  solitude,  superior,  musician,  £c 

(f°r  O1V  unaccented)  ure  ;  in  nature,  feature,  stature,  &c. 

\ (for  }  before  R,  unaccented)  o  ;  in  history,  victory,  &c. 

<L 

jy (for  jy  unaccented)  or  ;  in  razor,  visor,  orator,  curator,  &c. 

THE   TENDENCIES    OE    ENGLISH    PRONUNCIATION. 

The  varied  pronunciation  of  the  letter  R,  and  the  influence  of  R  on  a 
preceding  vowel  in  the  same  syllable  ;  the  tendency  of  long  vowels  to  become 
diphthongs  ;  and  the  comparatively  indefinite  sounds  of  unaccented  vowels,  are 
the  most  marked  characteristics  of  English.  These  have  long  been  noticed,  but 
the  precise  nature  of  the  peculiarities  has  not  hitherto  been  determined. 

Chiefly  on  account  of  these  delicate  and  unascertained  varieties  of  sound, 
the  native  pronunciation  of  English  has  been  found  excessively  difficult  for 
foreigners  to  master.  It  will  no  longer  be  so.  The  symbolism  of  Visible 
Speech  enables  us  to  define  and  exhibit  the  unaccentual,  as  well  as  all  other 
national,  dialectic,  and  even  individual  peculiarities,  with  the  utmost  exactitude. 
'  Knowledge  is  power  !'  The  simplest  work  is  performed  with  difficulty  while 
we  are  ignorant  of  its  precise  nature,  as  well  as  of  '  how  to  do  it ;'  but  nothing- 
is  difficult  when  we  know  the  exact  requirements  for  its  accomplishment.  Any 
language  dialectically  transcribed  will  be  pronounced  by  every  practised  reader 
of  Visible  Speech  just  as  it  is  spoken  by  those  '  to  the  manner  born/ 


117 

ENGLISH   CHARACTERISTICS. 

The  sounds  of  R  :  R  before  a  vowel  is  always  a  consonant  (Q)  ;  and  R 
before  a  consonant,  or  final,  is  always  a  glide  (^).  R  between  two  vowels  is 
simply  a  consonant  when  the  preceding  vowel  is  not  in  the  same  syllable,*  as 
in  sorry  (£"^J-(i)I)  ;  and  R  represents  both  a  glide  and  a  consonant  (IQ)  when 
the  preceding  vowel  is  syllabled  with  the  R,  as  in  soaring  (QH-QIGO- 

The  influence  of  R  on  a  preceding  vowel  :  Vowels  before  R  in  the  same 
syllable  become  '  widened  '  pharyngally  and  orally.  Thus  :  — 


aid,  air,        [ftQ,        [tf  hand,  hard,   QIQQ- 

ode,  ore,      }|Q,       M  held,  herd,    QIOOQ,       OIVQ 

pool,  poor,  Qij  GO,   Dl¥          spilt,  spirt,    QDICOU, 


A  similar  tendency  is  illustrated  in  the  common  pronunciation  of  such 
words  asj^A/andj^r(0)I|C00,  OfV  or  OIV),  come  and  curl  (Q39,  CI1VGO, 

or  aiyco),  &c. 

The,  tendency  of  long  vowels  to  become  diphthongs  :  This  is  illustrated  in  the 
change  of  the  consonant  R  into  a  '  glide  '  after  a  long  vowel  ;  and  in  the  regular 
pronunciation  of  the  vowels  in  aid,  ail,  aim,  ache,  &c.  ([ft),  ode,  oa?c,  globe,  &c.  (}^). 
The  same  tendency  leads  to  the  '  Cockney  '  peculiarity  of  separating  the  labio- 
lingual  vowels  }  }  (oo,  o)  into  their  lingual  and  labial  components,  and  pronoun- 
cing the  latter  successively  instead  of  simultaneously.  Thus  we  hear  1^,  \\,  11, 
for};  andH,  31,  IL  for  J. 

The  indefinite  sounds  of  unaccented  vowels  :  The  difference  between  unaccented 
and  accented  vowels  in  colloquial  pronunciation  is  one  not  merely  of  stress,  but, 
in  general,  of  quality  also.  The  following  are  the  tendencies  of  unaccented 
vowels  :  — 

I.  From  Long  to  Short. 

II.  From  Primary  to  Wide. 

III.  From  Low  and  Mid  to  Mid  and  High. 

IV.  From  Back  ynd  Front  to  Mixed. 

V.  .From  '  Round  '   (Labio-Lingual)  to  Simple  Lingual. 

VI.  From  Diphthongs  to  single  intermediate  sounds. 

The  2nd,  3rd,  and  4th  tendencies  combined,  affect  all  vowels  in  unaccented 
syllables,  and  give  a  general  sameness  to  their  sounds.  The  '  High-Mixed 

*  Si'c  '  Syllabif  Analysis,'  pnpr'  118. 


118 

Wide'  vowel  (1)  is  the  one  to  which  these  tendencies  point  as  the  prevailing 
unaccentual  sound. 

The  next  in  frequency  are: — the  '  high-back-wide'  (]_) — which  takes  the  place 
of  the  'mid-back'  vowels  (]  and  j)  ;  the  'high-front-wide'  (_[) — which  takes 
the  place  of  the  'front'  (I  and  [^)  ;  the  '  mid-front-wide'  ([) — which  takes  the 
place  of  I  ;  and  the  '  mid-mixed-wide'  (%} — which  takes  the  place  of  "[.  Greater 
precision  is  rarely  heard  even  from  careful  speakers  ;  but  among  the  vulgar  the 
sound  X  almost  represents  the  vowel-gamut  in  unaccented  syllables. 

The  5th  tendency  is  illustrated  in  the  vulgar  pronunciation  of  unaccented 
u,  (in  borough,  pronounce,  geobgy,  philosophy,  &c.)  as  ]  instead  of  }  ;  and  the 
]  constantly  tends  forwards  and  upwards  to  |  1,  1  and  J. 

The  6th  tendency  is  illustrated  in  the  vulgar  pronunciation  of  the  pronouns 
/and  our  (\  and  \V) ;  in  the  change  of  my  (GH)  into  31  or  Qf,  when  tmem- 
phatic ;  in  the  regular  pronunciation  of  the  terminations  -our,  -ous  (]y,  ]Q)  ;  in 
the  change  of  the  diphthong  day  (^[S)  into  0[,  Qf,  QX,  in  Monday,  &c. 

The  possibility  of  alphabetically  expressing  such  fluctuations  of  sound  is  a 
new  fact  in  the  history  of  writing.  In  ordinary  'Visible  Speech'  printing,  a 
standard  of  pronunciation  must,  of  course,  be  adopted.  Custom  is  the  law- 
giver ;  but  the  habits  of  the  vulgar  are  not  to  be  reflected  in  such  a  standard. 
The  principle  may  be  safely  laid  down  that  the  less  difference  a  speaker  makes 
between  accented  and  unaccented  syllables — save  in  quantity — the  better  is  his 
pronunciation.  The  Table  at  page  1 10,  exhibits  the  extent  to  which  distinctive 
sounds  for  unaccented  vowels  may  be  written  in  accordance  with  educated  usage. 

SYLLABIC    ANALYSIS. 

Good  pronunciation  is  distinctly  syllabic,  but  the  boundaries  of  syllables, 
as  uttered,  do  not  correspond  with  the  customary  divisions  made  to  the  eye.  The 
latter  are  regulated  by  etymology  and  by  letters  ;  the  former  are  governed  by 
the  natural  action  of  the  organs  of  speech,  which  is  always  from  close  to  open, 
or  from  consonants  to  vowels. 

In  the  analysis  of  the  word  table,  for  instance,  the  division  '  ta-ble '  is 
organically  correct ;  but  in  the  analysis  of  the  word  dabble,  the  division  '  dab-ble  ' 
is  organically  wrong.  If  the  vowels  in  dabble,  meddle,  middle,  huddle,  &c.,  had 
been  provided  with  distinctive  letters,  the  idea  of  a  different  principle  of  division 
from  that  of  '  ta-ble,'  '  bri-dlc,'  £.c.,  would  never  have  been  entertained.  The 
error  is  due  to  the  orthography,  which  requires  consonants  to  be  doubled  in 


119 

order  to  indicate  a  peculiar  power  of  the  preceding  vowel  letter.  In  'Visible 
Speech,'  each  element  of  sound  having  its  own  invariable  symbol,  the  words 
table,  dabble,  &c.,  would  be  correspondingly  syllabled  OCX-GOD  |,  Ql-GGOj,  &c.  ; 
the  first  syllable  in  each  case  ending  with  the  vowel.  This  division  is  purely 
analytic  of  the  sound  of  the  word  ;  it  corresponds  with  the  practical  divisions 
which  the  voice  always  makes  in  singing ;  and  it  preserves  the  transitional 
character  of  the  consonants  and  the  syllabic  function  of  the  vowels. 

The  associations  of  letters  in  syllables — b  a,  la,  a  b,  ab,  &c. — are  altogether 
conventional.  Such  arrangements  are  rendered  necessary  only  by  an  imperfect 
alphabet.  Yet  this  conjunction  of  a  final  consonant  with  the  nominally  '  short' 
vowels  has  led  orthoepists  to  discriminate  vowels  terminated  by  consonants  as 
a  separate  class  of  '  shut '  sounds.  There  is  no  physiological  ground  for  the 
distinction.  All  vowels  are  affected  in  their  termination  by  the  sound  which 
follows  them  ;  but  '  shut '  vowels  are  not  more  so  than  other  elements.  The 
combinations  GCfi,  CKG>  an<^  GL  IG  (ba,  abe,  and  ba,  ab),  are  precisely  ana- 
logous to  the  organs  of  speech. 

The  shut-vowel  theory  has  the  effect  of  making  speakers  clip  their  vowels 
unnecessarily  short,  and  of  depriving  these  elements  of  the  volume  which  is 
essential  to  effective  vocalization  whether  in  speaking  _or  in  singing. 

In  the  phonetic  syllabication  of  words,  any  consonant  between  two  vowels 
belongs  to  the  following  and  not  to  the  preceding  vowel ;  and  clusters  of  medial 
consonants  are  only  divided  to  show  the  elements  of  compound  words,  or  when 
all  the  consonants  do  not  admit  of  monosyllabic  union  with  the  following  vowel. 
Thus,  in  the  division  of  the  word  critical,  when  using  definite  symbols  for  sounds, 
we  should  write  as  we  pronounce,  GOf-Of-QlCO,  and  not  '  crit-ic-al.'  On 
the  same  principle,  the  word  apple  is  divisible  into  I-DGOj,  and  not  '  ap-ple  ;' 
but  in  such  a  word  as  ample,  the  division  is  necessarily  ID-DGO|,  because  the 
letters  GDCDj  by  themselves  would  make  two  syllables.  In  such  a  word  as 
testament  the  division  may  be,  optionally,  either  DtQ-OJ-DIvDD,  or  Ol~ 
QU3-Dl'u5O;  ^e  latter  is  preferable,  because  it  preserves  the  transitional 
character  of  the  consonants,  and  because  '  £"^U3  '  is  a  perfectly  monosyllabic 
combination  ;  the  former  is  admissible,  because,  both  of  the  medial  consonants 
being  non-vocal,  their  separation  makes  no  phonetic  difference. 

The  principle  of  syllabication,  as  above  explained,  is  dependent  on  the 
uniform  action  of  the  organs  of  utterance — from  close  to  open — and  is  thus, 
of  course,  common  to  all  languages. 


120 

We  now  present  the  Reader  with  an  Outline  Course  of  Lessons  illustrating 
the  mode  in  which  Vernacular  Reading  may  be  taught  to  children  and  illiterate 

adults. 

VISIBLE  SPEECH  APPLIED  TO  ENGLISH  FOR  TEACHING  THE 

ILLITERATE  TO  READ. 

LESSON  I. 

Show  the  learner  the  Alphabet,, and  tell  him  that  the  broad  round-looking 
letters  mean  puffs  and  hisses  in  the  mouth,  and  that  the  thin  straight  letters 
mean  sound  in  the  throat.  Then  teach  him 

The  breathing,  O- 

The  puffs,  d   O    D- 

The  throat  sounds,  -  £   f . 

The  sign  of  a  long  sound,  {. 

These  letters  will  be  perfectly  learned  in  a  few  minutes,  and  they  will 
furnish  a  number  of  words  and  sentences  which  should  be  read  at  once. 

Unexplained  letters  may  occasionally  be  introduced  in  cases  where  the 
reader  would,  from  mere  habit,  pronounce  the  letters  where  they  occur.  Thus, 
in  this  lesson,  Q  and  £T^  may  be  used  in  making  up  such  sentences  as  : 

01   non  ID-  ciroi   OIIOQ  ID- 

or   QIIDQ  10.  01   DIOI&   aioi. 

In  arranging  initiatory  lessons  in  other  languages,  the  same  principle  may 
be  applied  in  connection  with  any  elements  which  would  naturally  suggest 
themselves  in  a  given  context.  This  expedient  may  be  safely  adopted,  to  give 
variety  to  the  first  exercises  ;  but,  of  course,  each  letter  must  receive  sufficient 
explanation  in  its  proper  place,  in  a  subsequent  lesson. 

1 

LESSON  II. 

Call  the  learner's  attention  to  the  shape  of  the  letters  Q  Q  Q,  and  to  the 
parts  of  the  mouth  from  which  he  has  made  the  puffs.  Explain  that  all  letters 
pronounced  at  any  given  part  of  the  mouth  resemble  each  other  in  shape.  Then 
ask  him  to  point  out  from  the  Alphabet  any  other  letters  formed  by  the  back 


121 


of  the  tongue— by  the  point  of  the  tongue — and  by  the  lips.     This  he  will   do 

•\\'i  f  TT/-M  i  f    rl  t  ff-t  r*i  1 1  f  w  ^N*  M  or*t* 


vithout  difficulty.     Select 


The  lip  hisses,    -  D    3- 

The  tongue  hisses,  £J  Q  £Q. 

The  vowels,  3   3    3  A- 

A  comparatively  wide  range  of  sentences  may  now  be  read  ;  and  there  will 
be  no  need  to  limit  the  selection  to  monosyllabic  words — which  are,  on  the 
whole,  more  difficult  than  longer  words.  Nor  need  unknown  vowels  be  ex- 
cluded. The  eye  will  learn  a  great  deal  from  the  relations  of  the  symbols  ;  and 
the  teacher  will,  of  course,  at  first,  pronounce  all  words  for  the  learner's  imitation. 

LESSON  III. 

Give  the  learner  to  understand  that  he  can  make  a  puff  or  a  hiss  and  a 
sound  in  the  throat  at  the  same  time.  Let  him  hear  the  effect  in  the  sounds 
Sl5,  £12 >  SQ>  S>  3-  Then  show  him  that  these  letters,  and  also  Q  Q  0,  are 
the  same  which  he  has  already  learned,  but  that  they  now  have  the  sign  of 
throat  sound  united  with  them  ;  and  consequently  are  to  be  pronounced  with 
a  murmur  of  voice  mixed  with  the  puff  or  the  hiss.  Thus  : 

Puffs  and  hisses  already  known  :  QODQ^^DQ- 

Corresponding  murmurs  and  buzzes  :     QQOQQQ^BQ. 

The  new  letters  will  be  at  once  understood  ;  and  this  lesson  may  embrace  some 
additional  elements. 

Select  0.  The  learner  will  discover  by  its  shape  that  it  is  a  lip  letter,  and 
also  that  it  is  made  with  sound  in  the  throat.  Tell  him  that  the  additional 
mark  by  which  J>3  differs  from  0  means  that  the  letter  is  sounded  in  the  nose. 
He  should  then  select  the  other  '  nasals '  from  the  alphabet  for  himself.  Point 
out  the  relation,  by  shape,  of  Q  to  Q  and  of  Q  to  Q  ,  and  illustrate  the  sounds 

of  G,  Q,  0- 

This  lesson  has  introduced  a  large  number  of  letters,  but  these  involve  only 
two  new  symbols,  so  that  the  learner  can  have  felt  no  difficulty  ;  and  the  symbol 
for  '  round '  vowels  may  be  added. 

Begin  with  }.  Explain  the  meaning  of  the  short  cross  line,  and  pronounce 
3  and  }  several  times,  that  the  relation  of  these  letters  may  be  clearly  compre- 
hended. The  series  \  }  J  may  then  be  presented.  The  relations  of  the  three 


122 

sounds  will  be  readily  felt,  and  their  differences  will  be  perfectly  remembered 
after  a  few  repetitions. 

The  mark  \  may  be  associated  with  }  (J^),  with  the  explanation  that  the 
lips  are  to  move  a  little  closer  at  the  end  of  the  vowel. 

Reading  will  now  be  comparatively  easy,  and  the  learner  will  know  with 
certainty  whether  any  unknown  vowel  is  to  be  pronounced  with  the  lips  or 
otherwise. 

LESSON  IV. 

Call  the  learner's  attention  to  the  mode  in  which  he  has  pronounced  the 
letters 

O     0     C, 

and  let  him  discover  that  he  has  made  them  by  raising  the  point  of  the  tongue 
to  the  palate.  Then  show  him  the  letters 

Q     00  (r,  /,) 

and  he  will  see  by  their  shapes  that  they  also  require  the  point  of  the  tongue 
to  be  raised.  Tell  him  that 

Q  has  its  murmur  coming  out  over  the  point  of  the  tongue,  and  that 
CO  has  its  murmur  coming  out  over  both  sides  of  the  tongue. 

Let  him  hear  the  sounds  of  the  letters,  by  themselves,  and  in  words,  such  as 

Oil  CD,  001  1  Q,  Of  |CO,  (read,  lead,  reel). 
OHQ,  GOHQ,  <i)HO>,  (road,  load,  roll). 

There  is  only  one  other  consonant  to  be  learned,  namely 


Explain  that  the  sound  of  O  is  made  with  the  tongue  in  about  the  same  shape 
as  the  letter,  —  the  middle  raised  and  the  point  turned  downwards,  —  and  that 
the  sound  is  very  like  that  of  the  vowel  f  ,  but  shorter  and  closer,  and  with  a 
little  buzzing  added.  Let  him  hear  the  sound  by  itself,  and  in  words  such  as 

Oil,  OI|COCD>  Oil,  OHO,  O3G  (ye,  yield,  you,  yoke,  young). 

The  particulars  in  this  lesson  will  have  presented  no  difficulty,  and  a  new 
vowel  series  may  be  added. 


123 

Let  the  sounds  £  [  \  be  pronounced  a  number  of  times,  and  the  relations 
between  them,  as  well  as  between  the  symbols,  cannot  fail  to  be  discerned. 
The  learner  knows  the  position  of  the  tongue  for  £  :  explain  that  the  shape  of 
the  tongue  is  nearly  the  same  for  [  and  {  ;  but  that  the  high  part  of  the  tongue- 
is  a  little  further  back,  and  the  point  of  the  tongue  a  little  lower  for  [  than  for 
f,  and  for  \  than  for  [. 

The  mark  ^  may  be  associated  with  [  (as  in  Q[fi,  day?)  and  explained  as 
meaning  a  very  soft  sound  of  0. 

LESSON  V. 

Call  the  learner's  attention  to  the  two  vowels  which  he  first  learned,  namely, 
£  and  f.  He  will  observe  the  resemblance  in  the  shapes  of  the  letters,  and  he 
will  be  conscious  of  a  resemblance  between  their  sounds.  He  will  also  feel  that 
the  front  of  the  tongue  is  in  almost  the  same  position  for  both  vowels,  and  that 
the  difference  between  the  two  sounds  arises  from  some  change  at  the  back  part 
of  the  mouth.  His  attention  being  directed  to  the  matter,  he  will  probably 
have  a  sensation  of  widening  the  back  part  of  the  mouth  in  sounding  £.  He 
will  be  conscious  of  a  similar  sensation — whatever  it  may  be — in  pronouncing 
the  pair  of  vowels  ]  and  "],  which  he  learned  in  the  second  lesson  ;  and  he  wili 
now  notice  —  if  he  has  not  done  so  sooner — the  resemblance  between  these 
letters,  and  perceive  that  the  difference  between  them  is  exactly  the  same  as 
that  between  £  and  f . 

After  this  preparatory  exercise  on  sounds,  which  were  already  practically 
known,  introduce  the  letters  C  I  1  3"  J-  These  will  be  seen  to  differ  from  the 
letters  [  I  1  }  J  exactly  as  £  differs  from  £  and  ]  from  ].  Explain  that  their 
sounds  differ  in  precisely  the  same  way,  and  these  new  varieties  will  probably 
be  pronounced  with  accuracy  at  the  first  effort. 

There  are  only  two  other  accented  vowels  to  be  learned  ;  namely  J  and  J, 
The  letter  J  is  J  without  the  cross-line  ;  and  if  the  learner  try  to  pronounce  } 
with  the  lips  spread  instead  of  rounded,  he  will  produce  J.  He  will  feel  too 
that  the  sound  is  very  like  }  ;  and  he  will  perceive  the  correspondence  between 
the  letters  3  J  and  the  letters  [  \.  Explain  that  their  sounds  correspond  in  the 
same  way  ;  that  is  : — the  forepart  of  the  tongue  is  very  low  for  {  and  the  back- 
part  of  the  tongue  is  very  low  for  J. 

The  only  remaining  vowel  is  J.  The  letter  is  formed  by  joining  J{  together, 
and  the  sound  of  I  will  be  produced  by  trying  to  sound  JI  at  the  same  time. 

Q 


124 

The  vowel  X  is  always  followed  by  ^  in.  English.  Explain  that  y  is  a  very- 
soft  sound  of  Q. 

The  English  reader  has  nothing  more  to  learn.  This  short  course  of  in- 
struction will  have,  undoubtedly,  excited  his  interest,  and  thus  given  him  the 
best  possible  stimulus  to  perseverance  in  exercise. 

LESSON  VI. 

Revise  the  Complete  Alphabet,  sounding  and  naming  the  letters. 

Practise  Reading  on  subjects  easily  comprehended. 

Unaccented  syllables  may  be  printed  either  with  the  shades  of  sound 
actually  heard  in  current  pronunciation,  or  with  the  vowel  which  would  be  given 
to  each  syllable  in  separate  syllabic  utterance. 

The  latter  mode  should  be  adopted  at  first,  for  the  sake  of  simplicity,  and 
because  the  unaccentual  variations  are  rather  accidental  than  intended  ;  and  the 
learner  intending  the  written  sound  will,  very  likely,  fall  short  of  it  in  the 
customary  degree,  when  he  has  attained  the  power  of  reading  with  fluency. 
Besides,  good  reading  is  always  syllabically  distinct ;  and  a  reader  may  with 
propriety  aim  at  a  finer  syllabication  than  that  of  conversational  speech. 

The  only  advantage  attending  the  discrimination  of  unaccented  varieties, 
is  that  a  knowledge  of  them  prepares  the  learner  for  a  more  ready  recognition 
of  foreign  sounds.  The  writing  of  unaccentual  shades  will  occasion  no  difficulty 
after  the  more  important  elements  are  known.  [See  next  Section.] 

MODE  OF  DEDUCING  FOREIGN  SOUNDS  FROM  THEIR  SYMBOLS  WHEN  THE 
SYMBOLS  OF  VERNACULAR  SOUNDS  ARE  KNOWN. 

When  the  letters  which  represent  vernacular  sounds  are  known,  foreign 
sounds  will  be  deduced  from  their  symbols  with  facility  and  certainty.  Thus 
the  English  learner  knows  the  vowel  \,  If  he  try  to  pronounce  the  sound  with 
the  lips  spread  instead  of  '  rounded '  (with  no  superadded  effort  of  guttural 
compression),  the  result  will  be  1.  The  finger  and  thumb  may  be  used  to  spread 
the  lips  while  sounding  \,  in  order  to  get  the  true  result.  The  vowel  f  is,  of 
course,  known  ;  and  by  endeavouring  to  pronounce  H  simultaneously,  the  sound 
of  X  will  be  produced. 

In  like  manner,  the  attempt  to  form  the  known  sounds  ]  [  simultaneously, 
will  give  the  quality  of  \.  So,  too,  X  will  result  from  the  effort  to  blend  the 
sounds  of  JJ  ;  \  is  a  common  English  vowel,  and  J  will  be  obtained  by  spreading 
the  lips  while  sounding  J. 


125 

The  vowel  £  will  be  formed  by  trying  to  sound  [  with  the  lips  as  close  as 
for  J  ;  •£  will  be  formed  by  trying  to  sound  [  with  the  lips  contracted  as  for  3  ; 
and  J,  by  trying  to  sound  I  with  the  lips  '  rounded '  as  for  J.  So,  likewise,  the 
vowel  I  will  be  formed  by  the  effort  to  blend  the  sounds  of  Jf  ;  \  by  blending 
}{  ;  and  J  by  blending  J^. 

Unknown  varieties  of  '  wide '  vowels  will  be  produced  by  a  similar 
coalescence  of  known  sounds.  Thus  :  IClI3Jl3-Jare  English  elements  ; 
the  quality  of  the  vowel  1  will  be  obtained  by  removal  of  lip-modification  from 
1  ;  I  by  blending  If  ;  arid  1  by  blending  }  [.  The  unknown  f  will  be  obtained 
by  pronouncing  £  with  the  lips  contracted  as  for  J  ;  I  by  blending  ^f  ;  {  by 
trying  to  sound  C  with  the  lips  '  rounded'  as  for  3  ;  1  by  blending  J{  ;  \  by 
trying  to  sound  I  with  the  lips  '  rounded  '  as  for  J  ;  and  J  by  blending  J{. 

These  various  relations,  it  will  be.  observed,  are  all  expressed  in  the  symbols 
themselves.  [See  'Table  showing  the  Mutual  Relations  of  Symbols  and 
Sounds,'  page  41.] 

NOTE   ON    THE   ZULU    CLICKS. 

The  formation  of  these  peculiar  linguistic  elements  has  been  explained  at 
page  62  ;  but  it  seems  necessary  to  add  a  note  with  reference  to  their  symboliza- 
tion.  The  Rev.  Dr  Callaway  states,  in  the  Preface  to  his  '  Izinganekwane,' 
(p.  iv)  that  in  Zulu  the  clicks  '  are  never  heard  without  an  accompanying  con- 
sonantal sound ' — of  g,  k,  or  n.  In  all  such  cases,  the  writing  of  the  sign  <i  after 
the  consonant  expresses  the  click  without  another  consonant  letter.  The  click 
is  the  mere  removal  of  the  organic  contact  which  is  involved  in  all  '  shut '  and 
'  nasal '  consonants  ;  and  the  sign  «3  indicates  that  the  disjunction  is  made  with 
'  suction  stopped/  instead  of  with  the  expulsive  recoil  or  transition  which  com- 
monly finishes  the  consonant. 

A  click  only  requires  the  consonant  action,  of  which  it  is  the  conclusion,  to 
be  written,  when  the  click  is  used  alone,  before  or  after  a  vowel  ;  or  when  it 
follows  another  than  its  cognate  consonant, — as  GQ<. 

The  nature  of  the  clicks  will  be  best  understood  by  prolonging  a  voiced 
nasal  consonant — G  (D  or  O — an<^>  without  stopping  the  sound,  removing  an 
anterior  organic  contact  with  an  audible  effort  of  suction.  The  suctions  Q<t, 
O<s,  or  Q<j,  may  thus  be  made  if  G  be  '  held  ;'  Q<s  or  Q<*  may  be  made  while 
CQ  is  '  held  ;'  and  Q<*  can  alone  be  made  while  £D  is  '  held ' — without  inter- 
rupting the  sound  of  the  nasal  consonant.  The  clicks  Q<  and  XH  cannot  be 
formed  with  continued  vocality  ;  Q<s  can  only  follow  Q  €1  or  G,  or  occur  before 
or  after  a  vowel  ;  and  XH  can  only  precede  or  follow  a  vowel. 


126 

While  this  sheet  is  passing  through  the  press,  an  opportunity  has  occurred 
for  an  independent  study  of  the  Zulu  Clicks,  from  the  utterance  of  a  native  of 
Natal.  The  Author's  Son  (A.  G.  B.)  writes,  as  the  result  of  his  observation  of 
these  elements  : — 

"The  'Dental  Click'  (represented  by  c  in  Dr  Callaway's  Work)  is  O<«- 
This,  and  the  '  Palatal  Click,'  I  got  at  once  to  the  satisfaction  of  my  visitors. 
The  latter  (q)  is  Qc<«  (no  flap).  The  words  given  were  IGU<j'33Of  and 
iGlOc^}  '00  C  ICDL  In  the  former  word  the  voice  was  continuous  from  Q  to  Q  ; 
in  the  latter  word,  the  click  made  a  break  in  the  sound. 

It  was  some  time  before  I  was  equally  successful  with  the  third  or  '  Lateral 
Click'  (x],  which  I  pronounced  QH<«.  In  the  course  of  some  forty  or  fifty 
repetitions— in  the  word  Q]  G'Q'O  03  O£— I  gave  a  slight  prolongation  to  the 
'  suction,'  and  then  it  was  admitted  that  I  had  the  sound  perfectly.  This  click 
is  decidedly  »tt2-lateral. 

These  are  all  of  the  Clicks.  But  the  Zulu  sailor  gave  me  another  sound, 
which  I  should  term  an  expulsive  Click.  It  is  Dr  Callaway's  '  Lateri-Guttural 
Fricative'  (kh}.  The  sound  is  QA*>>  as  I  pronounced  it  in  the  word  IQA«>|93,-— 
which  the  sailor  said  was  perfect.  As  I  heard  the  sound,  there  was  no  lateral 
emission.  A  compressed  Q  is  formed  while  X  is  '  held,'  and  the  explosive  sound, 
heard  before  the  3,  has  quite  the  effect  of  a  Click. 

The  sound  of  hi  is  £J  ;  Ng  initial  is,  as  I  caught  it,  GQ.  But  the  sailor 
could  not  distinguish  any  difference  between  QQ{  and  QQf  ('  Ngi')." 

The  explanation  given  in  the  preceding  page  shows  why  a  click  after  a 
nasal  consonant  does  not  interrupt  the  continuity  of  the  voice ;  while  between 
two  vowels  it  necessarily  makes  a  break  in  the  sound. 

The  sound  of  hh,  written  CU*"  in  the  above  experiment,  is  perhaps  \\  — 
a  closure  of  the  super-glottal  passage,  as  in  the  act  of  swallowing. 


PROFESSIONAL     CARD. 


MR  A.  MELVILLE  BELL,  Author  of  '  Visible  Speech,' may  be  consulted  in  all 
Cases  of  Impediment  or  Defect  of  Speech,  Vocal  Weakness,  Monotony,  Oratorical 
Ineffectiveness,  &c. 

STAMMERING    AND    STUTTERING. 

The  experience  of  upwards  of  Twenty-five  years'  Practice  enables  Mr  A.  MELVILLE  BELL 
to  undertake  the  permanent,  and,  in  most  cases,  the  speedy  Removal  of  Stammering  and  other 
forms  of  Vocal  Impediment. 

References  of  the  highest  class  are  furnished  to  inquirers. 

A  limited  number  of  Pupils  can  be  accommodated  as  Boarders ;  but  residence  in  the 
Establishment  is  not  required  in  order  to  effect  a  Cure. 

DEFECTS  OF  ARTICULATION. 

In  cases  of  Lisping,  Burring,  and  other  Single  Elementary  Defects,  the  entire  Removal  of  the 
Faulty  Habit  rarely  needs  more  than  from  Six  to  Twelve  Lessons. 

Children  who  are  backward  in  acquiring  the  power  of  Speech  are  trained  to  the  perfect  use  of 
their  Vocal  Organs.  Parents  or  Governesses  are  invited  to  be  present  at  the  Lessons,  and  are 
directed  in  the  means  of  carrying  on  the  improvement,  which  is  always  rapidly  commenced. 

ELOCUTION-PRONUNCIATION,  READING,  DELIVERY,  AND  ACTION. 

Clergymen,  Barristers,  Members  of  Parliament,  and  other  Public  Readers  and  Speakers,  are 
Privately  Instructed  in  the  Principles  and  Practice  of  Effective  Delivery,  Oratorical  Composition, 
&c. 

Ladies  and  Non-professional  Pupils,  receive  Special  Lessons  in  the  art  of  Reading,  &c., 
according  to  individual  requirements. 

VISIBLE  SPEECH.-UNIVERSAL  ALPHABETICS. 

Pupils  are  practically  initiated  in  the  Physiology  of  Speech,  and  in  the  use  of  the  Universal 
Alphabet,  so  as  to  be  enabled  to  produce,  and  to  record,  all  varieties  of  Native  or  Foreign  Sounds. 

Dialectic  peculiarities  are  corrected  ;  and  Foreigners  are  taught  to  pronounce  English  with  the 
characteristics  of  vernacular  utterance  ; 

TERMS. 

Single  Lessons  in  any  Department,     -  -  One  Guinea. 

Cure  of  Stammering,  Stuttering,  &c.,                        (Twelve  Lessons,)  -  Ten  Guineas. 

Removal  of  Lisping,  Burring,  &c.,     -  -  (Six  Lessons,)  Four  Guineas. 

Elocution,  Reading,  Delivery,  &c.,     -                      (Six  Lessons,)  -  Three  Guineas. 

Visible  Speech. — Vocal  Physiology,  &c.,  -            (Six  Lessons,)  -  Three  Guineas. 


The  following  additional  Establishments  for  the  Cure  of  Stammering  and  for  Elocu- 
tionary Instruction  are  conducted  (in  Edinburgh)  by  Mr  MELVILLE  J.  BKLL;  and 
(in  Dublin)  by  Mr  D.  C.  BELL. 

EDINBURGH  :  No.  13  South  Charlotte  Street. 
DUBLIN  :   No.  1  Kildare  Place. 

Lo.Nj)os  N.W.,  No.  IK  HAKKINOTON  SQUAKE, 
(Near  Regent'*  Park.) 


SPEECH, 


BY 

Professor  A.  MELVILLE  BELL,  F.E.I.S.,  F.R.S.S.A.,  &c., 

Lecturer  on  Elocution  in  University  College,  London. 
[SOLD  BY  ALL  BOOKSELLERS.] 


VOCAL  PHYSIOLOGY,  AND   CURE   OP  STAMMERING. 

New  Edition,  entirely  re-written,  price  Five  Shillings. 

THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  SPEECH,  AND  CURE  OF  STAMMERING,  &c.— In  this  Work,  the  Theory 
of  Articulation,  and  the  Mechanism  of  Vowel  and  Consonant  Sounds  are  minutely  explained.  All  the 
elements  of  English  Speech  are  separately  treated  of,  with  especial  reference  to  the  Defects  to  which  they 
are  subject.  The  Cure  of  Stammering  and  Stuttering  forms  a  separate  section  of  the  Book,  and  directions 
are  given  by  which  the  Stammerer  can,  by  his  own  efforts,  remove  or  greatly  alleviate  his  impediment. 

Illustrated  Nursery  Boole,  price  One  Shilling. 

LETTERS  AND  SOUNDS.— An  Introduction  to  English  Reading,  on  an  entirely  New  Plan.  The  Sounds, 
instead  of  the  names  of  Letters,  are  made  the  basis  of  instruction  ;  and  the  lessons  are  strictly  phonetic, 
without  new  letters,  or  interference  with  ordinary  spelling.  The  work  contains  Practical  Directions  to 
Teachers  and  Governesses,  for  carrying  out  the  method,  and  for  the  prevention  of  Impediments  and 
Defects  of  Speech  in  children. 

New  Edition,  price  Sixpence. 

OBSERVATIONS  ON  STAMMERING,  AND  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  ELOCUTION.— With  Notes 
of  Cases. 

THEORY  AND  PRACTICE   OP  ELOCUTION. 

Third  Edition,  price  Four  Shillings. 

THE  ELOCUTIONARY  MANUAL.— This  Work  contains  a  summary  of  the  general  principles  of  Vocal 
Physiology,  elaborated  in  the  '  Principles  of  Speech' ;  with  a  full  development  of  the  Theory  of  Express- 
ive Delivery  ;  an  original  analysis  of  the  Tones  of  Speech,  and  the  Laws  of  Emphasis  ;  the  mechanical 
and  expressive  principles  of  Gesture,  &c.  ;  illustrated  by  a  Selection  of  upwards  of  Two  Hundred 
passages  carefully  marked  for  Exercise  in  Inflection,  Modulation,  Emphasis,  Action,  &c. 

New  Work  on  Applied  Emphasis,  \2rno,  price  3s.  G<7. 

THE  EMPHASIZED  LITURGY.— The  Morning,  Evening,  Communion,  and  Burial  Services,  and  all  the 
Collects,  marked  with  a  simple  directive  Notation,  for  Emphasi=  and  Clause.  With  an  Introductory  Essay 
on  the  Theory  of  Emphasis,  the  Expressiveness  of  Tones,  and  the  General  Intellectual  and  Mechanical 
Principles  of  Public  Reading.  Intended  for  Private  Preparatory  Study  of  the  Church  Offices. 


New  Edition,  greatly  enlarged :  stereotyped,  \2rno.  pp.  432,  pi  ice  3s.  (></. 

THE  STANDARD  ELOCUTIONIST.— A  Collection  of  Upwards  of  Four  Hundred  Extracts  in  Prose  and 
Poetry,  adapted  for  effective  Reading  and  Recitation.  The  Principles  of  Elocution,  condensed  from  tlie 
"Elocutionary  Manual,"  with  Relative  Exercises,  are  prefixed;  and  the  Extracts  are  classified  in  the 
following  Sections : — 


VII.  Recitations  for  Advanced  Students, (62  Extracts.) 
VIII.  Humorous  Recitations,  (45  Extracts.) 

IX.  Dramatic Speechesand Soliloquies, (Go Extracts.) 

X.  Dialogues  and  Dramatic  Scenes,  (17  Extracts.) 

XI.  Dramatic  Scenes  from  Shakespeare,  (9  Extracts.) 

XII.  Selections  from  "  Paradise  Lost,"  (13  Extracts.) 


I.  Miscellaneous  Readings  in  Prose,  (28  psges.) 
II.  Readings  in  Pulpit  Eloquence,  (30  pages.) 

III.  Ancient  and  Modern  Eloquence,  (40  pages.) 

IV.  Miscellaneous  Reading  in  Poetry,  (48  pages.) 
V.  Recitations  for  Junior  Pupils,  (43  Extracts.) 

VI.  Recitations  for  Senior  Pupils,  (58  Extracts  ) 

Prise  One  S/tilling  eaeh. 
I.  THE   LANGUAGE   OF  THE   PASSIONS.     II.  EXPRESSIVE    READING    AND  GESTURE.— 

Reprints  from  the  First  Edition  of  the  "  Elocutionary  Manual,"  consisting  of  Passages  marked  for 
Emphasis,  Inflexion,  &c.  The  notations  are  different  from  those  in  the  Third  Edition.  Students  of  the 
latter  may  obtain  useful  comparative  exercise  from  the  Reprints. 

In  Paper  Covers,  price  Eightpence. 

TREATISE  ON  THE  ART  OF  READING.— An  Outline  of  the  principles  of  Grammatical  Clausing, 
Emphasis,  &c.  as  more  fully  systematised  in  the  "  Elocutionary  Manual." 

Price  Sixpence  each. 

LECTURE  ON  THE  ART  OF  DELIVERY,  AND  THE  INFLUENCE  OF  SCHOOL  DISCIPLINE 
ON  PUBLIC  ORATORY.— Delivered  to  the  Educational  Institute  of  Scotland,  and  published  by  request 
of  that  Body. 

SERMON  READING  AND  MEMORITER  DELIVERY.— Delivered  to  a  Class  of  Students  in  the  New 
College  of  Edinburgh,  and  published  by  requisition  from  the  Class. 

INVENTION   OP  A  SELF-INTERPRETING  UNIVERSAL  ALPHABET. 

Inaugural  Edition,  4/0,  Price  Fifteen  Shillings. 

VISIBLE  SPEECH,  OR  THE  SCIENCE  OF  UNIVERSAL  ALPHABETICS.— A  c<  mpkte  Theoreti- 
cal and  Practical  Exposition  of  the  Invention,  and  its  applications;  with  modes  of  Instruction,  &c. 
Illustrated  by  Tables,  Physiological  Diagrams,  Exercises,  and  Examples  of  Visible  Speech  Printing  and 
Writing. 

In  Paper  Covers,  price  One  Shilling. 

VISIBLE  SPEECH.— A  NEW  FACT  DEMONSTRATED.— This  Pamphlet  contains  a  description  of  the 
nature  of  this  Cosmopolitan  Invention,  and  a  record  of  its  experimental  applications :  offer  to  Govern- 
ment, &c. 

NEW   PRINCIPLE    OP   PHONETIC    SHORTHAND    WRITING, 

for  which  the  Medal  of  the  Royal  Scottish  Society  of  Arts  was  awarded  to  the  Author. 

Book  for  Beginners, — price  Sixpence. 
THE  SHORTHAND  MASTER-BOOK.— Adapted  for  Self-Instruction.     Nine  Plates. 

Price  One  Shilling. 

POPULAR  STENOGRAPHY. — Embracing  the  substance  of  the  Paper  read  before  the  Society  of  Arts,  with 
the  First  and  the  Curt  Styles  of  Writing. 

The  Complete  System,  price  Half -a- Crown. 

THE  REPORTER'S  MANUAL,  AND  VOCABULARY  OF  LOGOGRAMS.— Containing  the  whole 
svstem,  from  its  Alphabetic  Rudiments  to  the  Development  of  Principles  adapted  for  Verbatim  Reporting. 
Twenty-two  Plates. 

Any  of  the  above  Works  will  be  sent  POST  FREE  by  the  Author,  on  Receipt  of  (lie  published  price. 

Address. — 18  HABIUNGTON  SQUARE,  N.W.,  LONDON. 


ALPHABETIC  YOCABULARYor  TEST  WORO5.- 

6li  (Ga.) 


0]*  -0} 


C 


C 

e 


€1  3tV  J  €|  CO  t 


alu'ulma 


a 


oc 


'?3  tLC 


C  orvs  t>  n  ix  rv  tr<  . 

i    ,        r 


(Ga.) 


FieilVrcuj 


ral3R[         ,'F. 
nfei-  &[& 

CO 


Qlirf 


2 
£l 


i\ 


oil 


^1 


VOCABULARY        (.  Co  n  K  viuecl  .) 


(Sc.) 


(IrO 


(1.) 


(Co«.k.) 


U51 


T. 

T. 
T 


.  « 

Uln.ijo"[racj 


TJU)V1 


Q)lB 

•GTK]IOO 


C0e.k. 


V 


fie.) 


PL. II. 


(Tee.-) 


xjr]crr  (Ge.y 


PL.  III. 


OCABULARY        (^  Ccnxtt/rtu.ftd  .) 


Sc., 


isc.) 


bj]  wrcrA, 

atfiTSTTi  Wl 


Duxr 


p  i<n  rt  a  I 


OW[{C  (Sc.) 

(Sc.) 


3  uit  el  i  Sc.i 


DUilul 


(Se.J 


0jX^W 


Varieties    of 
Pronancjatjon. 


(T.) 

(St.) 


[one] 


(  Modern) 

&'      (Coc-k.) 


(St.) 


O?n 


J? 


(Trov.) 
(Am.1) 


(Tor.) 


o 


In.    i 


PL    IV. 


1  NTE  RJECTl  ON  AL       A.ND         1  IS  ART  \  C  U  1-ATE        BOUNDS        °<S  C  - 

3}'MS  V 

acua- 

(oo^  n  ^ 

^Ji^li   TD' 

a  c  u  a  • 

n.i   ani  'anoi- 

(oO     Jf   'I-         Ji  Pl^         J',   '[. 

Q-<-     Q»<. 

uu\j-     xrc-    xrcr- 

(o-OA)    UJ,  XJjiXJj.'ufi  T3J« 

Opj\- 

Pin-    '0':3 

(OM    xl-   4-    *V  "xLi. 

Dt>*li       0)^1 

ojfi  •    ojs  • 

(«t)0  ruxsla-  ITU  la-  Tryla- 

D-Vl 

at;   rlti- 

QSOB'WB,  «V,^ 

Dn.i     on     on 

4«<    x^«    x^< 

pco]?i    elol  bcojt-  DCO]?- 

3UA-i        O-U 

r!s;.   bi;  r!si<    IM 

jo  oj  1  9  \      €.  ^  1  1  t 

W 

{'   {<   a»rfs{ 

0  '             0  -               «=>  V% 

^hvino^occiq 

•J 

B  I  A  L  E    C  T    S  . 
& 

Pr'O'nXl'VT.  C.i.Cxtvovi        Q^       tat       N  \*  101  4Y  <x"l  S      1     f"o     iH  . 

Co  cknty 

Borcltv    f») 
(Tefioi-t/a^o; 

T?a.  «_  (>  (_  a.  3  ^l) 

•n«ae.au-a«« 

^!/lllt;0 

*x"£l™(f) 

I 

3I;^ 

H* 

(Tt  (  GT 

«O,    (Tff 

Crxsr 

I« 

* 

alt,TlIl 

U3(i 

«[« 

USji 

u»p 

TT3J;, 

3  '  rT-<»>.fx 

rv^Tx 

rtwL 

cwlt 

sawf-, 

nu)[i 

u 

3P 

3}?w 

3]?W                  3]?W 

0|?<*) 

ojngj 

s- 

3}»S 

3^3 

3]t3 

3]I3 

oil  3 

3ll3 

b 

nfan 

nCa^ 

aCan           ^Can,a]aa 

n[oiji. 

alan 

7 

apw 

rtls^f 

nlarcsr        als^f 

5l[3"S?l 

n^s^j 

* 

0«n 

T5TCS"Cr 

1(00 

[;CU 

[cu 

JCU 

/O 

UTO 

TJT^^ 

^.f 

TFUi 

irpv 

^^r 

M 

la3T  3  GT  > 

ICxjIs'CiS'i 

TcolBi^ 

IU)  13  'Cff  [ 

Vwlsxsn 

Icofcs^i 

'» 

1J3T  CO  3 

XJ31-  CO 

TJ3£CO 

W[W 

TJ3TCO 

U3JCX) 

20 

U3TG''1D"I 

IP                      T          P 
TTTCTD-i             USiSnJl 

amoral 

uȣvaf 

a^i^cTj:  . 

*  "Written     frorrv      tht     Dccru-tVovx      Q£  (1)  J?IT.  J  A  ii-TVI  *.vv  r  a  ^/  ',   (Z)   ?h^-  GeQ.^lpK*<n»tbn«  , 

(3)  DfWr-A*-ckd  B«1V:(i)    j?fi**    D.  S.  Dry  i  dctle  -,(^)   Tf^X.  J.  For  rc.*t-  . 

.  ,  .   ,..L   --_____^^ 

TL.V. 


TE5T-SENTENC 

[The     UKtnf    i&     always     on     L-kt  ^trsf 


ES._    DIALECTS. 


.Aberclee  11 


f  Ml,8}wG 
'f  j  co|tflw 


3w]a  Dflla   of  rol  . 
Jcu  af  1  1  ejiof  fcilcr  m 
o]sn  ([no  rol  . 


ro 


Jaf 

W   snl  3)fi    o[i3. 

I'l'Jg.  s7)i  >^« 

-u,  mlu^i  usji  3ju5l 

u^  jt  U)  }  D!  (J  }atn  Wft  ,  ITS  u  9ji 

D  alia 


ml  ,3]ur  ••«•»?  U^  I  "^}  op  [o 
sal  ,a&In..Tsr[t  •  '  '!Q  3]^-^  1 


J 


I  [w  ,t3(coln,  jo- 


.  Icr  B|,T  n]w 
<nw  uw  Tu 


sic, 


w[acoi    | 


JP 


jw    1  ,O]WQJ    }  . 


Di 


m     )3[in 


.c  ua 


Tc  v  I  at  da.  t'e. 


c^  Ibjei  ral   nltcn 

ol+c 

llw  Trlje,    nltcn- 


^    I 


01  1 

^T    a}? 


UJ-I 


sol 


Ico 


p]?   1  ( 


TJ 


Qli  d[iTff 


snl 


sn.T 


w   X?LT(JSIU)    G^ItJ  -a? 


TD  I  A  L  E  CT  S 


Scotti^K   Border  ('Conn  *i  u«4  j 

f'3  Tcfl?    I  .pluuLn ,  fg    iW1    rurT?G  U] 


slum 


!<*>  QtwAuf  aTn   3^(j[Tsr  iu   sni 
T    t   rol  acojetaTun . 


. 
X)W    1      I 


Q 


Jftff 


u;  alomul 

I  aiscui    slwl 


j  aji  ]f)Iv 


ul  s*T  vj?il. 

3]D\J     Oil    GCJtU-f  ^   Oi?l    3(^1^ 

a  ITS  ej]a  m 


Of  in  ^  3!  [  lu  o[&2. 
nje^a   ml  ojw  n.ol. 


lei  IV. 


e  ,9  a 


[<  n[a  l.plul 


sa 


1  0[®iu  ©f 


3}u  ^Iw- 


w    uf- 


uj,to-   I^ocoTciD    lotv 
3");  u  crli  ,  n  [a    si  G,-^'1  ,  xl 


,  OJQ,  1 


ȣ 


nit  Q 

TiT  U  3 


xffiw  I  olio: 


Ol 


^    ml  pi  \  Cx)    3J  t  ? 

n. 

,  tefr  tf  a  Tu  'z 
f  a|p  0u[a  ^i 

©linon   n]1& 


fo. 


PL.  VII 


T    EST-    SEiSTENCES  (C<mtVKu*<t) 
P  o  r  e  i  Q  -r\  ~&  ~n  g  I  i  S  K    . 


{eeiicofxr    IPX    3^1    Tslhldf 
IK-  IP-  ftfv- 
si!  -w 


al-   ')x    0)3  -al   a^a 


F  o  v-  e  L 


sju'ta}^}    ay(a]. 
]\   }f    P]uk>]    ]'w]i    Ji   Jcoj*. 
ap    ei'ojn^. 

Okj]     Opl  . 


ic^    1    rLDbu)|-Qr 


a 


o 


3*1; 


,33*     lauf 
ofi  o 


,  ji3|ei]?n, 


nl  s\  , 


PL.  VIII. 


SHAKSPERIAN  ENGLISH. 

Portia's      Speccli     on     M  c  r  c~y 

AS     PRONOUNCED     IN    THE   TIME       OF       SUAKSPERE 

WriCUn    fioiTi    l))£  Dictation   of 

JOHN    ELLIS  , Esq.,  F  K.S. 


IC  a^jcoful    ^s  &run]i   IR  orju 
fu    uJuJoCtt  ,  3  a    rat   ^u(^aco\ 
JD^XST    sa[  bwjia  ^[TST^.SU  ;  lu 
fu  0cx)^a[n    ote    sa;)u    eilsn,,]^    ote 

fCn.u;   fu 
saQuj"    ois^ 

Olsa    npu^w    ^in    sn.[ 
ul  ^0" 


{a  Isa 

fu  I 


a  3 


Jasfal 


3 


ojwua   {3    alo.sa  , 


TJ! 


ra[  altu)n 

nit 


B!   sap    DCJO[\  , 
-.  36 


safn  , 
^3    In 
^ 
ul 


^3    19"[UJAp. 


xn  .'     of 


J-- 


loan., 


sa 


foa 


o    o(,o[,ala   ] 
$n[i  ujuula   jvw 


_snl 

£  D]  , 


]*  [B 


tjn.  Jx 


ut 


jr'3 


ST. 


[U 


ral 


3J-1 


.   T?U! 


&u']-'&£fifa6/f»/nj  jit 
ul  aD  . 


^  fu  01  riiu  1  nfei  feurfeftfi    a 


TT!  pal  -tffcp  p  Ij5ul\n]n  p 

nld  ]R  jwn}  T?!W  lizr  njut 

u]^r  ]P  fur  Dwf?i"Qri  , 


PL.  IX, 


pa 


\  ol 


p  sal 
sal  u 


PL.X. 


J^rol   atwfynrow    n 

?i  jx  spu  ul  UlP[aq]a  slW  jhjui-al  pro 


13.  tf  pjT2*  ,    ?  a        K  f          sol  3*       wnr  ou       os^i,  ]B]S  sal 


18- 


20. 


sal  a^  ,  u]xTJrIei    w]#«T5J    ]B^U  faf    ^Try   sn^O   oiuu 
©I. 

^jwjico   3j',colip  trl  ml 
$  JtT  Ol»lswl  TJ]Q 
JQ!<  \  ID  Isn.  oj^cr  oji   sul  xil  afa  jer[0nu   nT 

15  |>u  ]  if  si^cr,  Oli  jus  ^3?,COi^9-  I^o-  ol  n,  }i&  "Qvl\x»i}a  oi 


win   D]*DJrv,  ol  i^fna    sn,[    j  oforlauji  "prc    ]  afuorCa  e}in   p 
nTqsn,   ofuu  ca]j    a[siu    afcof^TOQ  p    w}ia    nte^jn.  fur   oil 
afa)    1]bJ*   Jisrul  s^ij 
17.  "Qlwlswla    SR.I   3u      sal   Df'rDO)i,^«  J4///9  sa 


snT 


icj  oji 

i    Oj-rD  £>[   Iiy  sal   ~cr[SDco; 


PL.  XI. 


ut 
<?i]T3    $n}?$n   sfou    snl  buplun  prur 


ufc 


Qw]xau   -ol^    npji  , 


ol 


t  O  co  t  ,  ^u   ol  snl   "(jjv^oycr^  cu  n  . 

ol  iu]a   no[*a   oj- 
,  jOjtco,  su]?   jiu 

ral 

xi".  |3]-o    ol  n-[o 

aol-a    oj^r~t    ral    ajiu^i     p 
ae.3j.t    saT  alei    5?}?[n.    p    ml,  in    n£ei,sn., 
3^  aolta    owl*  co  I:    3ji    ]ii   "[p  Dp  a  55(7;  is  (;GJ 


CJC]T,U 


ml 


Qfe  Jeiuifo),  »Iwti3i[nxj  sn)?    snT   o 


}'eiu)£b] 


Dj-^cc 


sa 


fn 


pi 


in  |Ti 


alei    u) 


31. 


32 


o[    o 


olip 
j]^r  J3 
fisr  ] 


}?ura)f 


is 


VISIBLE  SPEECH  WRITING. 


PL 


CONSONANTS. 

BACK.  | 

c    £    L    L    a   a 

BACK-VOICE 

C    £    fe    &       ¥     %? 

FRONT.  . 

/     /    7    "2       /     2 

FRONT-VOICE. 

/;    y3  /?  a    J  J 


LIP. 


LIP-VOICE. 


POINT. 

L     ^    L    'L      6     t 

POINT-VOICE. 

U   V    U    W    jf    If 


VOWELS. 


Written,  as  under,  for  'High,'  'Mid,"1  and  'Low'  varieties: — 
Primary.  Wide. 


BACK.  MIXED.  FRONT. 


BACK.  MIXED.  FRONT. 


ROUND. 


ASPIRATE,  GLIDES,  MODIFIERS,  &c. 

X  0  1 1 1 1  t  L  1  ?  tt*  *?  i  t  1 1    f  y^  /-/ 

X  O   0  0  I   5    I    I    I   I   I   I    I   ¥   1    (    f    \    \    \    \   A    Y    1 

The  following  require  no  change  in  Script  : 


PRINCIPLES. 

Voice-Consonants  and  Primary  Vowels  have  a  loop  formed  in  the  hair-stroke  of  the  letters. 
Round  Vowels  have  a  break,  or  bend,  in  the  body  line  of  the  letters. 
Round  Glides  have  a  cross-slrohe,  as  in  the  '  print  '-letters. 
Nasal  Consonants  have  the  nasal-sign  written  horizontally. 

'  High  '  Vowels  ascend,  '  Low  '  Vowels  descend,  and  '  Mid '  Vowels  ascend  and  descend  beyond  the 
line  of  the  Consonants. 


J* 

PL.  XIII. 


,  XSV. 


br 

fljr  %/fc  dptryts    afar  /?   z>f*l  zytfifaf  •.  la   It  &f/?  n 

-afyr  <y&  tfajir  tfl  .  ft  wfr  //  sw/vfa  y  tx 
3.  ^#r  fa  ft  pfe  p&r  frw/jfa    '?  sutf^    3*7  6/1,  ft  &o-  o 


Tft 
tf        C2//  &fo  * 

fotf'i  (dna,ftfl*>  n// 


tff  &fe  ffkb  ,  AW  ova 

5.         y  j*i   v     (toU^r  fi/f  nJ  S 


//// 


V-       <* 


(rf  'iflj  foil    fa-   %/?(,    ifob  ,    rty    &lu>  fc 
- 
far 


17.     m  cu     tryt    -     wz  •  tfhz)  n/f 


of  MW  ?nj  rfyf 


TU  uf     tf    a'iH-v     <.       ??  o      # 


19. 

^sy^  /I  ul?  j    tfft 

20.  ^6  r^6  $  vfycj  yfc  ryt  ft  ^z>  h  zjfa  3^nf/t^rr  sr 

/file  fa  far 

Ri.  Ofi  rif 

L3f*/fi>    Sir'/-:  £-rY   (fh   ri^A  tjfcfrl    ftfi  lf/(J  A/ut&r-   V3  8  ft 

^        ylv  tirft  oi%  ,  /jtt  &hj   SMTWfiM    %/bfiJ?  //  06z>. 

,  eft?  k  k  cut 


&>/ic? 

;  AW  Cl/f 


a/ 


I  flfe&'itf,  ?ki  If  nd  Ofad  fyzn  , 


try 


2.7. 


///  . 


30. 


31. 


,    (TH 


one 


ffl 


It 


oyi 


1  Capital,   Lower- Case,   and    Script.) 

ivrr  PT^   nr^T^ 
J 10  iU   Ulou)  f 

jxu      lor       o].35ri  7     o[co)-Gr      D[I   $n,]j,     isr(7,T9. 
tyn/i      vUi       in     If     ofsw      DID  fa    t>ft    a'/ A    zfrfo 

orscne  QI&.  PUI  3ru  BIUJJ?  ro  im,ifi  iDmu 

a]t9 .     sn,]^    slu     &I    T3]is     fui     yn     ^   [a   la   IV 


m 


fay     if/tut     <t>of*. 

3i!3H'Gi3  m  uiojm.iw  wu 

ia.       (TITGI      W&W         j 

*f<)if.     fry    uftx  J? 

Bid): 

ilulqx       ] 
Jr 


aiwrs  JR  JFI  oion 


//  7^^  iff*?  .fj> 

iTO  DiBuciura  wo 

0  r\  ' 


fa} 


911  D31H 


,**   « 


PL.  AVI 
SPECIMEN     OF     5CRI  PT-TVPOOR  APH  I   C. 


y/>    //    tafia    vl  n     cil  (>J<zf> 
3-16   &i/uti>l    ft  [ft  £>fajz> 


01$   cif 

2{LJ    ?j 


if 


?/fir    n/  vly  ^* 
$  6    tlftfUl,  U 

fof 


Cl/ 


6. 


,  aft, 

;  y/>a/v     cur  df  £/%•?,  (~ifi    1^   fnf  ;  yfn/Y  n/t  A 
U  Y^  3i*lt   fefi  . 

$.3]?  zf  ?)?  Ix  a/n^xtf  zf  /xjplfft    I*  #f?<  . 
10  (fyt  'yf*   n,£6    y/tv    If  /3/v3fat    If  ctjto  ,  cif*    n.^6 


I*  M16 
II.  Jr 


fr   ft     3jj>  /  6  1  ft  nix  /ft   svfta    [J>  /  6lftu*  ,  ft 

j>6    3*  ft  <fi 


/ 

fr   V£CJ  ft    ZJ?    ft  3W  /,/  r  /»  9 

*J?  /Afcx/i   sfii,  ofro, 


-. 


SEp    1   0  1982 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


Bell,  Alexander  Melville 
Visible  speech